JP2018027409A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To increase an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: operation means which can be operated by a player; and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing appearance of the operation means, one of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing appearance of the operation means, and one of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing appearance of the operation means. A first performance, in which the second image is displayed at a second position apart from the first image in a first direction in a state where the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, and a second performance, in which the third image is displayed at a third position apart from the first image in a second direction in a state where the first image is displayed after the first performance, can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that can execute a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a start opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like can be performed.

JP 2016-29956 A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing the appearance of the operation means,
In a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, the second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in the first direction. After the first effect and the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction with the first image being displayed. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the second performance.

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine described in application example 1,
In the second performance, the second image is not displayed.

[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
The gaming machine, wherein a display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than a display time of the second image in the first effect.

[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image and the third image are larger than the first image, respectively.

[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4,
In the first effect, the second image is displayed tilted with respect to the first image.

[Application Example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 5,
In the first performance, the second image may be displayed so as to overlap with a decorative design.

[Application Example 7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 6,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position in a state where the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric Chu open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of V opening-and-closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart which shows a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of prefetch effect determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is explanatory drawing of basic production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a movable accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating button image operation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial expansion display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial expansion display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial expansion display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion movement effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image protrusion display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and the operation part image movement effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and the operation part image movement effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and operation part image movement effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and the operation part image movement effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and operation part image superimposition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and operation part image superimposition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon and operation part image superimposition production | presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation count effect A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining operation count production B (success). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation count effect B (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image inclination display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image inclination display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image inclination display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer button effect A. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a timer button effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer pseudo | simulation continuous production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer pseudo | simulation continuous production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding change effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding change effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding change effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the acquired ball number display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the payout display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the payout display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image and character image superimposition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image and character image superimposition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image and character image superimposition effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect A in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect B in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect A in button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect B in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation production | presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation production | presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge effect A (success). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge effect A (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation continuous point effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation continuous point effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer freeze production A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining timer freeze production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer freeze production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating chance up meter production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating chance up meter production B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining chance up meter production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the holding timer effect A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a hold timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the holding timer effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer appearance acquisition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer appearance acquisition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer appearance effect acquisition effect C. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. The forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's launch operation and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the game ball wins a specific winning device. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached inside the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a movable frame body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by a player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation portion provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end portion of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses. The The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of executing two different operations: a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53 and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like. The movable frame body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed prize device (hews) 19, and an ordinary variable prize device (electrical chew) 22. A gate (through chucker) 28, a first grand prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a regular prize winning port 27, an out port 16, and indicators. 40.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. And a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The on-hold images 9A and 9B are images representing the on-hold and are also referred to as a on-hold icon or a first on-hold icon. The reserved digest image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold icon or the second hold icon. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a first special symbol and a combination of effects symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. If it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variable display of effect symbols, an aspect of scrolling up and down may be used, or an aspect other than that. Depending on each lottery result, what combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “effect symbol variation effect”, “decorative symbol variation effect”, or simply “variation effect”. In addition, this decorative design variation effect counts an effect in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops, the temporary stop effect is included in the decorative symbol variation effect.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to the effect symbols. Further, the image display device 7 can identify that the special symbol is changing in addition to the effect symbol, or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a first hold display area for displaying a hold image 9A in accordance with a stored number of first special figure hold described later, and a hold image 9B in accordance with a stored number of second special figure hold described later. And a second hold display area. The number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (to be described later) and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b by displaying the hold images 9A and 9B. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digest image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect design (effect designs 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The center decoration body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is provided with a movable board movable body 15 (also referred to as a movable accessory 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick. A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet part through which game balls flow in and an outlet part through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flow in from the inlet part to flow out from the outlet part to the stage unit 11.

  The fixed winning device (jaw) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting port (first starting winning port, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and determining a jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electrical chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second winning port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). When the movable member 23 is in the open state, the second starting port 21 can enter a game ball. It should be noted that the electric chew 22 should be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for obtaining a normal symbol random number (per random number) and determining a hit.

  Here, the “special symbol lottery” means that when a game ball wins the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. In addition, it is a process of determining whether or not a big hit by comparing with a value corresponding to “big hit”. The result of the “hit” lottery is not immediately notified to the player, and a special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. This symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

  The “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. This is a process for determining whether or not it is a hit. The lottery result of the normal symbol is not necessarily notified immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the normal symbol display unit 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the normal symbol, and the predetermined variation When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first grand prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning prize opening (first special winning prize opening) 30 and , A V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening / closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

  The first grand prize winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game ball that has passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass inside the first big winning device 31. . The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of a game ball to the first big prize opening 30. The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate and rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is de-energized, the first state is assigned to the V region 39 (rotation state), and the second state (stop state) is assigned to the non-V region 70 at the origin. . The V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game balls that have passed through the first grand prize opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. FIG. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, a retreating state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V region 39 is brought into the retracted state (first state). You may comprise so that it may become (2nd state). In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. The first grand prize winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize winning device 31. The first grand prize winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second grand prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first grand prize winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second grand prize winning port (second special prize winning port) 35. It has. The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second grand prize opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in an open state.

  The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In addition, the number of the normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the game holes 3 to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called “left-handed”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning at the first start port 20 by left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to aim for passing to the gate 28 by right-handed, winning to the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, and the second big winning port 35.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display 40 includes a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol reservation indicator 43a, and a second special symbol indicator 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the stored number of operation hold (first special figure hold) of the first special symbol indicator 41a. The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general figure hold display 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbols”. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as “special symbol display 41”. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold indicator 43”.

  The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays the lottery based on winning in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , The result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (a jackpot symbol) having a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is displayed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is displayed in a stopped state (the type of the winning jackpot). Alternatively, a special game (a jackpot game) is performed in which the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of multiple types of jackpots to be described later), 1, 2 from the left such as “○ ●●● ○○ ●●” , The jackpot symbol in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. In the case of losing, a losing pattern in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as “●●●●●●● ○”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is varied (variably displayed) over a predetermined variation time. For example, each LED may be lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random number values (numerical information) such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are obtained. Then, it is temporarily stored in the special figure storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first start opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting opening 21. The second special figure hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area 85b (FIG. 5). There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. “Digestion of special figure hold” refers to determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and executing variable display of a special symbol for indicating the determination result. Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable symbol variable display is performed. Even if there is a win during the middle or the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the jackpot lottery right for the win up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. The first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure holding | maintenance display device 43 displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance by lighting LED for the number of special figure holding | maintenance.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol (variation display) and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. If the normal stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 to an open pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed as “◯◯” (◯: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal lose symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as “● ○”. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a normal lose pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is changed over a predetermined fluctuation time. For example, both LEDs may light up alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a general figure hold in the general figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the reserved map storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and variable symbol display for displaying the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. The common figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common figure holds by turning on the LEDs by the number of common figure holds.

2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control related to an effect executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from other boards via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize port sensor 30a, a second big prize port sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning a prize opening sensor 27a are illustrated. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric Chu solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize winning solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20 a is provided inside the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided inside the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big prize opening sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35. The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning port sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning port 27 and detects a game ball won in the normal winning port 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure hold display 43a, a second special figure hold display 43b, and a general figure hold. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a launch device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out a prize ball. Based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize ball. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental payout device 130 to pay out the balls. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to ball rental based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launch device 112 detects the touch of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100 and controls display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. And image data such as a background image are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Furthermore, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a panel lamp 5, and a panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable board 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) for determining the operation mode of the movable board 15 and controls the operation of the movable board 15 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the panel movable body 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  An effect button detection switch 63a and a movable frame body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable frame body 600, and controls the operation of the movable frame body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and that outputs a detection signal when a human body touches. It may be connected.

3. Data structure of gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub-ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a general figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first prize flag, a second prize flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in special operation processing described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored, and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, random number groups (holding information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (hold information) corresponding to each of the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general figure hold storage area 86 stores a random value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the general figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above-mentioned area, the main RAM 84 has a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive in which drive data for driving the panel movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. A data buffer or the like is provided.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) for storing commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main process (described later), and includes a preliminary determination command, a reserved ball number command, a change start command, a change Stored are a stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, and the like. The effect command set area 94b is an area (in which a command output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 is set in the sub control main process (described later) ( An output buffer), a change effect start command, a pre-change end command, a change effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The advance determination information storage area 94c stores advance determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a general figure hold effect counter. A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. Yes. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variable pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning big hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 Take. Reach is a state where there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random value group acquired based on the entrance to the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the entrance to the second start port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the general symbol hold storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “prefetch effect random number” and a “chance up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used to determine the prefetch effect at the time of the change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up effect at the time of the fluctuation effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetching effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows the diagram. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether or not the jackpot random number (any one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to “big hit” or “lost” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined as “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ")" Indicates that it is determined to be "lost". In the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined as “big hit”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be “lost”. The contents of “normal probability state” and “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the game control microcomputer 81, the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to “with reach” or “without reach” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined that “there is a reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). 127) "indicates that it is determined that" no reach ". Further, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5” in the “short time state”, it is determined that “there is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Indicates that “no reach” is determined. The contents of “time saving state” and “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-short state is less likely to reach the lost time than the non-time-short state. This is to increase the digestion speed of special figure reservation by selecting more reachless loses with a short variation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol hit determination table T3 corresponds to whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “win” or “losing” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determining whether to do. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined as “winning”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2” (3 ˜255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 254”, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)”. It is shown that it is determined as “losing”.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol depends on the game state (non-short-time state or short-time state) in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8D, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short-time state”, and the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “1 second” in the “time-short state”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. According to the jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the jackpot type random number (any one of 0 to 127) according to the “big hit type” and “special symbol type”. It is a table referred to in order to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 24”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV planned passing jackpot”, One stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as “big hit symbol 1”. When the jackpot type random number value is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined as “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined as “jackpot symbol 3”. When the jackpot type random number value is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantial 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled passing jackpot”, It is shown that the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) in the special figure 2 is determined as the “big hit symbol 1”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the “special figure stop symbol data” corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, the “opening (OP) command”, the “round designation command”, the “ending (ED)” of the special game Command "can also be specified. For specific contents of “16RV planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 15R) V planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short-time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time-short state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in the non-time-saving state, it is determined as “losing” in the jackpot determination table T1, “reach” is determined in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is “1”. When the random number value of the variation pattern is “0 to 60”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the short-time state, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “big jackpot”, the jackpot type determination table T5 is determined to be “16RV expected jackpot”, and the fluctuation pattern random value Is “0 to 10”, it is indicated that the variation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching reach, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer variation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the variation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuations.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew release pattern determination table T7 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the game state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12 (A), the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined as “open pattern 11” in the “non-short-time state”, and the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 12” in the “short-time state”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once and the opening time is 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened at an opening time of 3 seconds, an opening time of 2.0 seconds, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains, when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (the prescribed number of winnings, a maximum of 10).

  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the main control main processing (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in accordance with the first main winning opening 30 and the second main winning opening. It is a table referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is “open pattern 21”. When the special figure stop symbol data is “14H” or “15H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “13H”, the release pattern is “open”. It is shown that the pattern is determined as “pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th rounds with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening once for the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big prize opening 35 is opened (short-open) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened (short-open) for the number of times of opening once and for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 16th round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening once and an opening time of 29.5 seconds. . However, the opening of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 may be performed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (a predetermined number of prizes, a maximum of nine). Closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined as “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined. When the data is “13H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 33”, and the special figure stop symbol data is When “15H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. On the 8th and 10th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second and sixth rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and the second winning is found. When this occurs, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the fourth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds. .

4). Explanation of jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “bonanza” and “losing” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “losing”, the special symbol display 41 stops and displays “losing symbol”. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the last round game is finished. Yes. Each round game starts at the end of the opening or at the end of the previous round game and ends at the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are two types of jackpots: “V pass planned jackpot” and “V non-passed jackpot”. “V pass planned jackpot” operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (a V passing scheduled opening pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the “V passing planned jackpot”. The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the big hit game. “V non-passing expected jackpot” is an opening pattern in which a game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern), the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a jackpot that operates. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the “V non-passing jackpot”. When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game The game ball cannot pass to 39. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves both as a V passing planned opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

  “V-planned jackpot” includes “16RV-planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V-planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 15R) V-planned jackpot”. The “16RV expected jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second grand prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantial 13R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot”, from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “V non-passing jackpot” is “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the open pattern 22 where the total number of rounds is 16R but the total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot”, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot” is a jackpot of substantial 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 12R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V opening 39 is in the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As apparent from the above description, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot” are the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is that it is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is Low accuracy time short state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” makes it easy to pass the game ball to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a short time state (highly accurate high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V expected jackpot”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is less probable. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) or the high-accuracy time-short state (high-accuracy high-base state) is reached. That is, the game state after “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a high-probability time-short state (high-probability high-base state) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ) But a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variation state).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V pass expected jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passed jackpot. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) are all the jackpots that are expected to pass V. In other words, when a big win is won by a lottery based on a winning to the second starting port 21 that can be entered by executing electric support control, which will be described later, the V passing planned jackpot is always made. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the big hit that is performed by winning the game ball at the second start port 21 rather than the big win lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol) that is performed by winning the game ball at the first start port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) ”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Accordingly, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result of the special symbol variable display (stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol becomes high.

  In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control with respect to the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “short time state”, and the state in which the game time control is not being controlled is simply “a non-short time state”. That's it. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than that in the non-short-time state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) determined so that the variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently than the non-temporal reduction state in the short-time state. The used variation pattern is determined. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed. A short variation time is easily selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at the same time, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time-short state and does not execute it in the non-time-short state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability determination control T3 (the normal symbol per unit determination table T3 in which the number of normal symbol random values (hit random number values) determined to be hit is larger in the short-time state than in the non-short-time state. Using FIG. 8C, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the short time state, the hit probability is higher than that in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable symbol normal display will be a winning symbol increases. In the short-time state, the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the non-short-time state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than that in the non-short time state (FIG. 12). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game balls are frequently won at the second start port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not executed is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) may not execute all the controls described above. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the open count increase control for the electric chew 22 It is only necessary that the electric chew 22 be opened more easily by executing one or more controls than when the control is not being executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state.

  In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the planned V passing jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the player has passed the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time-short state”. The high-accuracy base state is ended when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times) or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to winning the V non-passing jackpot is the normal probability state (non-high probability) if the V region 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). State, ie, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low accuracy high base state” and a “low accuracy time short state”. The low-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-short-time state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or “low probability non-short state (also simply referred to as non-short state)”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously when the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball to the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. Note that the gaming machine 1 plays a right-handed game even during a big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. It is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, the player makes a left turn to win the game ball at the first start port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

6). Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to a success / failure determination unit (FIG. 23) and a prior / failure determination unit (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value shown in FIG. 7A). , Normal symbol random value) is added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the main timer interrupt process is completed, the counter value update process by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed until the main timer interrupt process is started next. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing is not started immediately but is started after the interrupt is permitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number update processing is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing performed in the above-described main control main processing (FIG. 15). In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the main timer interrupt process execution period and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process until the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out a winning ball according to the type of winning opening to the output of the main RAM 84. Set to buffer. The various sensors are, for example, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, the second big winning port sensor 35a, and the normal winning port sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the start port sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V region sensor detection process (step S106), holding ball. Number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reservation balls is “4 (upper limit)” (step S202). The number of normal symbol reservation balls is the number of general symbol reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of general symbol reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4” (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reservation balls is “3” or less (step S202: NO), after adding “1” to the number of normal symbol reservation balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is stored in the first to first reserved memory areas 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

  In step S <b> 205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not won the second start port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure hold, more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the second special figure hold provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “3” or less (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label) -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second specified figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure hold storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process will be described later.

  In step S <b> 210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved ball number is the number of first special figure hold, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4” (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “3” or less (step S211: NO), after adding “1” to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Prior Judgment Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, no prior determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination as to whether or not the game is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referenced and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. It is judged beforehand whether it is a big hit with reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. The prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

  When the result of the big hit prior determination is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot prior determination is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type prior determination (step S305). In the jackpot type prior determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot type prior determination based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is “0” to “127”, it is pre-determined as “16RV scheduled jackpot”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination processing (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, the advance determination is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a change pattern preliminary determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly includes a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And the reach random value is acquired. Next, here, since the time-short state (the time-short flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11), the jackpot advance determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the reach presence / absence preliminary determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot advance determination result and the reach presence / absence determination result, a loss with reach is determined in advance, and the random number value of the variation pattern is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that the number of reserved balls is “1 to 2”. ", The variation pattern" P64 "to be selected, and if the number of reserved balls is" 3 to 4 ", the variation pattern" P68 "to be selected is selected. In the present embodiment, prior determination is performed using a variation pattern determination table T6 used in a variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, a variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from the above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a prior determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning, and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1). )) To determine whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. The jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processes in steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol held balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Accordingly, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 in a state where the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0”, the number of held balls of the normal symbol is once “1” in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of held balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of special symbols held temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly sets a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure hold storage area) of the general figure hold storage area 86. Per random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not it is in the short time state), and the normal symbol per determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, when the normal symbol random number is “0” to “2” in the non-time-short state, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as “lost”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines a gaming state (whether or not it is a short-time state), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol variation. The variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern is selected. Here, in the non-short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “30 seconds”, and in the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “1 second” (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start normal symbol variation display (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the variation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol variation display is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “losing” in the above-described hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the winning determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a short time state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew release pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22 release pattern. Select. Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts an electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the process.

  In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been achieved is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521). Finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the special prize winning device (the first big prize winning device 31 and the second big prize winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to “1” of “special operation status”, Called “2”, “3”, “4”. When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the “special operation status” is “2” (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation processing, the variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the “special operation status” is “3” (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the “special operation status” is “4” (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning to the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the holding information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b to the side where it is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. According to the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9B (the leftmost hold image 9B among the four hold images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively on the left side. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and a fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). In the case where the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired due to the winning to the first start port 20 in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. If there is no storage, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the rightmost hold image 9A among the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation was digested. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). Note that the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. For example, the game control microcomputer 81 may make a determination based on ON / OFF of a demo screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process is terminated. If the standby screen is not displayed (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414) This processing is finished. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the first special figure hold is executed only when the second special figure hold is “0”. That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold has a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V pass planned jackpot). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) in FIG. 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) in FIG. 1 are the same in the process flow, and will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of FIG. 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart hold area) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process in FIG. 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the first special chart hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit” (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart holding storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process in FIG. 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is “losing” in step S1503 or step S1505, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). This process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) in FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) in FIG. 1 have the same process flow and will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time is short is made depending on whether or not the time flag is ON. If the time is short (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes with reference to the table for the non-time-saving state V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process in FIG. 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special figure reservation) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the planned V-passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-short state shown in FIG. ”To“ P3 ”, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern“ P21 ”to“ P23 ”) is referenced (addresses are set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P21” to “P23” in the special figure 2.

  When the jackpot type is a V non-passing expected jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-short-time state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V non-passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Part). One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  If the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process in FIG. 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special figure holding area) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is a non-short-time state, the reach determination table T2 is based on the table for the non-time-short state (reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value is a portion from “0” to “13”)). Determine presence or absence.

  When the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-short-time state reach loss, the portion corresponding to the reach-less loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P7” to Reference is made to the “P14” portion, and in FIG. In the special figure 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, any one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, when the number of reserved balls is “3” to “4”, the variation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is “1” to “2”. More short variation patterns are selected. Thereby, when there are many reservation balls, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be accelerated.

  When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-short state reach-less loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reach-time loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P15” to Reference is made to the “P16” portion, and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns “P32” to “P33”). In the special figure 1, either “P15” or “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Again, since the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls changes, the function of shortening variation according to the number of retained balls is activated.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short-time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, and a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is already described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short-time state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the short-time state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the expected V passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the expected V passing jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. Is referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and in FIG. 2, the fluctuation pattern is “P61” to “P63”). From the read fluctuation pattern random value, any one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P61” to “P63” in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a planned V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the planned non-passing jackpot in the short-time state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. ”To“ P46 ”). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the process. The set variation pattern information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the change display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the special symbol variation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the change stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

  When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the winning pattern and the opening / closing pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the selected jackpot type (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the winning pattern and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After the release pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to “4” (step S1807), and this process is finished.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of shifting to the time reduction state, “100” is set to the time reduction counter in the low accuracy high base state, and “160” is set to the time reduction counter in the high accuracy high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the hour / hour counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the hour / hour flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information on the current gaming state that has just been set (whether it is a probable change state, a probable change counter value, whether it is a short time state, a short time counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time reduction flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time-short state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-short-time state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state while the jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric material processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “hit winning flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the release pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening / closing member operation processing for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first grand prize opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation process, the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9 When the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not being opened (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203). For example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and the opening time of the first round game has been reached, or when the time for opening the grand prize opening is reached, the grand prize opening that was temporarily closed after the opening is opened again This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until has elapsed and the time for opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  When it is time (timing) for opening the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of jackpot. After the big prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, in the case where a large number of winning holes are opened during a single round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured so that the winning hole is opened in one round. It may be determined whether or not the opening is the first time, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process is finished.

  In the above-described step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening closing condition is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes in the round winning game in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning quantity (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the winning prize opening. (That is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening). If the condition for closing the special prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the grand prize opening was closed. This is because the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing as described above. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

  When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter value to 1 decrement (step S2221), and determines whether or not the round counter value is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not “0” (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been consumed yet, the present process is terminated to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball has passed to the V region 39 with “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no game ball passing to the V region 39 in the “big hit”. As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 with the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected to pass big hit”, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passed expected big hit It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is terminated.

  In the above-described step S2200, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and displays a special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thus, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round when the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is finished. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the first ball winning is detected (step S2503). When the first ball winning is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process is finished. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first winning is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2504). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened short-circuited in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether it is “short opening” or “long opening”. This is because sometimes a short opening (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. Note that when the V opening / closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short. Therefore, the first game ball won in the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed are set to a V effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not being executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid” means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This is in consideration of a period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before closing the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage during the V effective period (the passing of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected, and the V flag is detected when the V passage outside the V effective period (the V invalid period) is detected. It is supposed not to turn on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). In this way, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraud, so that the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, when it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning is detected (step S2522). When the second winning is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the second winning is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2523). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B) is “Long opening” and the long opening when the second ball is won (here, 31.5 seconds at the maximum). ). In addition, since the maximum round game time here is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally the second ball winning The time from the time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is because the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, so that at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls won in the first big winning opening 30 will open the V region 39. It is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period when the V opening and closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period along with the closing of the V open and closed member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process, and the V ineffective period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) has elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). Examples of the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 include, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 in the case of short opening. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process is finished while the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has been completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and the process ends. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set to the hour / hour counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes the “non-high probability state”, the “short time state”, and the “high base state” (that is, the low probability high base). This low-accuracy base state ends when the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets “160” in the probability change counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307) and sets “160” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “high probability state”, a “time-short state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a highly accurate high base). This high-accuracy base state ends when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 160 times or the next jackpot is won.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball break period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. Is done. If it is not during the V effective period (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passing command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the held ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7). Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. The effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, the sub timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interruption process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interruption process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The process during the change effect is a process for setting a pre-change end command at a specific timing during the change effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute the specific display effect, and details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 for various commands set in the effect command set area 94 b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like. To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that performs light emission control of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends the process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing or the like is performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “prefetching effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern in the case of executing it. Details of the pre-reading effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reserved ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter are updated. Thereby, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of reserved balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the ordinary figure hold effect counter, the hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), variation effect start processing is performed (step S4460). “Variation effect start processing” is processing for selecting a variation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special symbol change. Details of the variation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The “variation effect end process” is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 being changed is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described change effect end process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination included in the opening command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect that is preset corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. Are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between releases in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data and information related to the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, an effect pattern of a preset round effect corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is displayed in the effect of the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In step S4485, when the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the round effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). “Ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the information related to the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether the state is a high probability state, whether it is a short time state, whether or not Counter, hourly counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed V. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (customer standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this process.

[Pre-reading effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot advance determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type advance determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the prior determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the jackpot determination information, the jackpot type information, and the variation pattern information described above, prefetch effect pattern information is stored. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variation effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39A, the jackpot determination information “losing” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the prior determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third pieces of the special figure 2 hold. A state is shown in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area and stored in the area. FIG. 39 (B) shows the special figure 2 winning from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth special figure 2 hold. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the prior determination information. In addition, in addition to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A” is used as the pre-reading effect pattern information. "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state where the change has been completed from the state of FIG. 39B and the prior determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. The preliminary determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the prefetch effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 indicates that the advance determination result included in the received advance determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “Leach with reach” has occurred (step S4603). Whether it is “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined, for example, based on a variation pattern prior determination result (variation pattern information). When the prior determination result included in the received prior determination command is “no reach loss” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because it is not necessary to perform pre-reading production. On the other hand, when the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect, And prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-read effect is determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 55”, the prefetch effect is “none”, and when the prefetch effect random number is “56 to 67”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. Also, if the pre-determined result is “Leach with reach” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 107”, the prefetch effect is “None”, and if the prefetch effect random value is “108 to 114”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area. Also set “Pattern A”. As a result, the prefetch effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the region and the first to third storage areas) executed before the change effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed with the changing effect corresponding to the region depends on the progress of the changing effect. That is, in the variation effect, the prefetch effect is not executed when the timing for executing the prefetch effect has already passed, but is executed at the timing before the timing for executing the prefetch effect. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the change start command (step S5000). Here, the production control microcomputer 91 sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the change start command and information related to the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic structure of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 and determines the basic effect pattern.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing normal reach effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP1 effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP2 effects, and a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP3 effects, A plurality of types of basic production patterns for performing reach-less loss production are set. The kind of basic production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1”, the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P72”, the basic effect pattern that performs the reach-less loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a part for determining a chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33”, “P41” to “P56”, “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO” “2-SP1” “2-SP2” “2-SP3” “3-NO” “3-SP1” “3-SP2” “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later. The type and content of the chance-up effect pattern are not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to combine the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. Thus, it is determined what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the change effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the change effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. In the variation effect timer, a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set. For example, when the variation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the fluctuating effect process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the changing effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the changing effect timer is zero. If the variation effect is not being performed (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-change end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-change end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-change end command, the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, and the like.

  If it is not the time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-change end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), the pre-change end command not including the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before end of change including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect for displaying a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect for fading the preview image.

8). Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer or the like which appears in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When the image is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the change effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Even if the pre-change end command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notification fade effect for fading the preview image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When the image is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image with the variable effect stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when receiving the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a is displayed. When a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When a ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is terminated.

9. FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (panel movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the panel movable body 15 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on. The board movable body 15 is in the home position when it is in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the state in which the board movable body 15 exists in the position shown in FIG. 46 is an expansion | deployment position. The effect control microcomputer 91 can move the panel movable body 15 from the home position to the deployed position. The board movable body 15 is basically at the position of the home position, and is appropriately moved to the development position by the effect control microcomputer 91 according to the display effect (game effect). When the movable board 15 is controlled to move to the unfolded position, it is arranged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (the front side of the display screen 7a), in other words, the display screen 7a as viewed from the player. It is arranged at a position overlapping with the predetermined area. Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking a predetermined area of the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. Moreover, the board movable body 15 is provided with a star-shaped hole 15a at the center. Therefore, when the panel movable body 15 is in the unfolded position, a part of the display screen 7a can be seen from the hole 15a. Moreover, the board movable body 15 will be in the position which does not overlap with the display screen 7a, when it exists in a home position.

10. Examples of Effects, Examples of Effects, Modifications, and Aspects of Embodiments Hereinafter, examples of effects (examples of display effects, examples of movable object effects) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and an example of the effect example will be described together.
The effects described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, prior determination information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted.

  The button image operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This button image operation effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect or the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the button image operation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Button image operation effect A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect A. In the button image operation effect A, first, the first button image display of FIG. 47 (A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move leftward (in the direction of the black arrow) and frame out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47B, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the effect symbol. In this specification, “images overlap” means that they appear to be overlapped when viewed from the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, if at least a part of one image displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing from the other image, it can be said that the images overlap.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47C, in the state where the first button image BI1 and the second button image BI2 are displayed, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1. . Next, as shown in FIG. 47D, in the state in which the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, and the third button image BI3 are displayed, the fourth button image in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1. BI4 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47E, the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, the third button image BI3, and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1. A fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), in the state where the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 are displayed, the characters “push !!!!” for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63! An image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Button image operation effect B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect B. The button image operation effect B differs from the button image operation effect A of FIG. 47 in the timing at which the second to fourth button images disappear from the display screen 7a. The first button image display of FIG. 48 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 47 (A). That is, the first button image BI1 is displayed, and the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move leftward and out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48B, in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the effect symbol. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48C, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1 almost simultaneously with the disappearance of the second button image BI2 from the display screen 7a. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48D, the fourth button image BI4 is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1 almost simultaneously with the disappearance of the third button image BI3 from the display screen 7a. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48E, the fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the lower left direction of the first button image BI1 almost simultaneously with the disappearance of the fourth button image BI4 from the display screen 7a. The fifth button image BI5 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), in a state where the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 are displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of “Press!” And the timer bar TBI are displayed. The The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is longer than the display time of the second to fourth button images.

[Button image operation effect C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect C. FIG. The button image operation effect C is different from the button image operation effect B of FIG. 48 in that an effect of moving the button image is mainly performed. In the first button image display of FIG. 49A, the first button image BI1 is displayed as in FIG. 48A, but the hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and the hold digest image (the hold digest image) The icon 9C is not moved and is displayed as it is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49B, in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the effect symbol. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49C, the light ball image moves in the lower right direction of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the third button image BI3 is displayed. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49D, the light ball image moves to the right of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49E, the fourth button image BI4 and the first button image BI1 both move in the lower left direction and then stop. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), in a state where the first button image BI1 and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of “Press!” And the timer bar TBI are displayed. The The timer bar TBI overlaps with a part of the fourth button image BI4. The display time of the fourth button image BI4 is longer than the display time of the second and third button images.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of the button image operation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the second button image is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The first effect in which BI2 is displayed, and the second button in which the first button image BI1 is displayed after the first effect and the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1. Production can be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. After the first effect, the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 can be executed in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the button images appear one after another at different positions on the display screen 7a, so that the player can be entertained visually and the entertainment can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. The second button image BI2 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 49, in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is Do not show. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce an effect such that the button image disappeared from the display screen 7a reappears at a different position on the display screen 7a.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the first button image BI1 is displayed and the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. Longer than the display time. Also,
As shown in FIG. 49, the display time of the fourth button image BI4 in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the right side of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed is In a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is longer than the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the display time of the button image that appears in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the second button image BI2 and the fifth button image BI5 are each larger than the first button image BI1. As shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 and the fourth button image BI4 are each larger than the first button image BI1. According to this structure, a player can be surprised at the time of the display of the button image which appears in the state in which the 1st button image BI1 was displayed, and the improvement of an interest can be aimed at.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a lively feeling to the display of the second button image BI2 that appears in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the second button image BI2 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. According to this configuration, the second button image BI2 that appears in the state in which the first button image BI1 is displayed appears to be located at the back of the decorative image, and a sense of depth can be produced in the display. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the button operation promotion image OPI of “Press!” Is displayed in the state where the fifth button image BI5 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 49, the button operation promotion image OPI is displayed in a state where the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the button operation promotion image OPI appears together with the button image appearing in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension and to improve the interest. be able to.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a button image operation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, an effect using a button image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image representing the appearance of a type of operation unit other than the effect button 63. For example, a similar effect may be performed using an image showing the appearance of the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 instead of the button image. Moreover, you may use the image of arbitrary operation parts, such as a handle image, a lever image, and a trigger image. In addition to the operation unit image, an arbitrary image such as a specific character, graphic, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the button image operation effects A to C shown in FIGS. 47 to 49 may be displayed in appropriate combination. For example, in the button image operation effect A, the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are out of the frame from the display screen 7a. Further, the button image operation effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, or other effects may be added. Further, the button image operation effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions shown in FIGS.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, five button images (first to fifth button images) appear in FIGS. 47 and 48, and four button images (first to fourth button images) appear in FIG. However, the number of button images appearing in the button image operation effect may be 1 to 3, or 6 or more.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing the appearance of the operation means,
In a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, the second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in the first direction. After the first effect and the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction with the first image being displayed. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing the second performance.
[Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the second performance, the second image is not displayed.
[Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
The gaming machine, wherein a display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than a display time of the second image in the first effect.
[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image and the third image are larger than the first image, respectively.
[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the first effect, the second image is displayed tilted with respect to the first image.
[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
In the first performance, the second image may be displayed so as to overlap with a decorative design.
[Aspect A1-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-6,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position in a state where the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

  The operation part partial enlarged display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. This operation part partial enlarged display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation portion partial enlarged display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation section partial display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the operation portion partial enlarged display effect A. In the operation portion partial enlarged display effect A, first, the sword member image display of FIG. 50 (A) is executed. This sword member image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center right of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI also includes a first sword button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. That is, since the sword button 65 is provided at the end of the handle of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1), the first sword button image PSB is drawn at the end of the handle of the sword represented by the sword member image ASI. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50B, the second sword button image SBI appears from the position of the first sword button image PSB of the sword member image ASI with the sword member image ASI displayed. The second sword button image SBI is an image representing the appearance of the sword button 65, similarly to the first sword button image PSB. In other words, the second sword button image SBI is an image representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, the second sword button image SBI moves in the lower left direction while being enlarged, and stops on the left side of the sword member image ASI. Accordingly, the second sword button image SBI larger than the sword member image ASI is displayed in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), in the state where the sword member image ASI and the second sword button image SBI are displayed, a “push !!!!” for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63! A character image (button operation promoting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the sword button 65 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping the second sword button image SBI. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI.

  When the player operates the sword member 64, as shown in FIG. 50E, the second sword button image SBI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the explosion image EXI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Operation part partial display effect production B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the operation portion partial enlarged display effect B. In the operation portion partial enlarged display effect B, first, the first button image display in FIG. 51A is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51B, the second button image BB appears from the first button image BI with the first button image BI displayed. Similar to the first button image BI, the second button image BB is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51C, the second button image BB moves to the left while being enlarged, and stops in a state where a part of the left side of the second button image BB is out of the display screen 7a. . Thereby, in the state where the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB which is not displayed on the left side but is larger than the sword member image ASI is displayed. Since both the first button image BI and the second button image BB represent the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1), the second button image BB not partially displayed on the left side is the first button image BI. It is an image showing a part (a part other than the left side of the effect button 63).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51D, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the first button image BI and the second button image BB partially framed on the left are displayed. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI for “Press!” And a timer bar TBI indicating an operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed so as to overlap the second button image BB. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI.

  When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the second button image BB is framed out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Operation section partial display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the operation portion partial enlarged display effect C. In the operation portion partial enlarged display effect C, first, the select button image display of FIG. 52 (A) is executed. This select button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a select button image SSI representing the appearance of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower right of the display screen 7a. The select button image SSI is composed of four button images corresponding to the four buttons (left button, right button, up button, down button) constituting the select button 68 (FIG. 1). Here, in the select button image SSI, an image corresponding to the left button of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is referred to as “first left button image LI”, and an image corresponding to the right button is referred to as “first right button image RI. " In addition to the select button image SSI, a plurality of panel images PN are displayed on the display screen 7a. A predetermined image (for example, a character image) may be drawn on each panel of the panel image PN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are displayed below the display screen 7a in a state where the select button image SSI is displayed. Similar to the first left button image LI and the first right button image RI, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI represent the appearance of the left button and the right button in the select button image SSI. . The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are larger than the select button image SSI. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are images representing a part of the select button image SSI (left button and right button).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52C, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the select button image SSI, the second left button image PLI, and the second right button image PRI are displayed. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI for “press !!!!” and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the select button 68 are displayed. The timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI.

  When the player operates the left button of the select button image SSI, as shown in FIG. 52D, the color of the second left button image PLI changes and is selected and enlarged in the panel image PN. The panel to be replaced is replaced. When the operation effective period of the select button 68 ends, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI disappear from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the selected panel image PN is enlarged and displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of an operation part partial expansion display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50C, the second sword button representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed. An effect in which the image SBI is displayed can be executed. As shown in FIG. 51C, the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a part other than the left side of the effect button 63) is displayed in a state where the first button image BI is displayed. The production can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the second left button image PLI and the second right button image representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI in a state where the select button image SSI is displayed. An effect in which PRI is displayed can be executed. According to these structures, a novel effect can be impressed to a player and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50C, the second sword button image SBI representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is larger than the sword member image ASI. . Further, as shown in FIG. 51C, the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a part other than the left side of the effect button 63) is larger than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI representing a part of the select button image SSI (left button and right button) are larger than the select button image SSI. According to these structures, a player can be surprised and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50D, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIG. 51D, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI. As shown in FIG. 52C, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI. According to these structures, a novel effect can be impressed by the player, and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50F, the display time of the second sword button image SBI is shorter than the display time of the sword member image ASI. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 51A to 51F, the display time of the second button image BB is shorter than the display time of the first button image BI. As shown in FIGS. 52A to 52F, the display time of the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI is shorter than the display time of the select button image SSI. According to these structures, a novel effect can be impressed by the player, and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 64 can execute a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 and a second operation of pushing the sword button 65. As shown in FIG. The member image ASI shows a portion that is movable during the first operation (sword member pushing operation) of the sword member 64, and the second sword button image SBI is the second operation (sword button pressing operation) of the sword member 64. The part that sometimes moves is shown. The select button 68 can execute a first operation of pressing the up button and the down button and a second operation of pressing the left button and the right button. As shown in FIG. The portion that is movable during the first operation of the select button 68 (up / down button pressing operation) is shown. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are the second operation of the select button 68 (left / right button pressing). The part that is movable during operation) is shown. According to these structures, a novel effect can be impressed by the player, and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an operation part partial expansion display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first operation part image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, or the select button 68 and the second part representing the part of the operation part image. Production using the operation unit image is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image representing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the above as the first operation unit image. For example, the first operation unit image may be an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the operation part partial enlarged display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the operation part partial enlarged display effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, or may include other contents of effects. Further, the operation part partial enlarged display effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions shown in FIGS.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A2-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing a part of the operation means displayed on the first image,
A gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means. .
[Aspect A2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first performance, the second image is larger than the first image.
[Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an operation reception period of the operation means,
In the first performance, the third image is displayed at a third position closer to the second position than the first position of the display means.
[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first effect, the display time of the second image is shorter than the display time of the first image.
[Aspect A2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
The operation means can execute a first operation and a second operation with different operation methods,
The first image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the first operation,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the second operation.

  The operation part image protrusion movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This operation part image protrusion movement effect can be executed during a decorative effect change effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation portion image protrusion movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation part image protrusion movement effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the operation portion image protrusion movement effect A. In the operation part image protrusion movement effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect of FIG. 53 (A) is executed. The hold icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (hold icon) 9C move leftward and out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the enlarged button image appearance effect of FIG. 53 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in an enlarged state. Since the button image BB is enlarged and displayed, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the display screen 7a. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the displayed button image BB overlaps the effect design.

  Next, the button image left movement effect of FIG. 53 (C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is reduced and displayed from the state of FIG. 53 (B) and moves to the left. As shown in FIG. 53 (C), the left end of the button image BB is the display screen. 7a is out of frame. Next, the button image right movement effect of FIG. 53 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves to the right from the state of FIG. 53C, and as shown in FIG. 53D, the right end of the button image BB is framed out of the display screen 7a. It becomes a state. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the effect button protrudes from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 53 (E) is executed. Specifically, in the button image BB, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB at the same position as in FIG. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 53 (F) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promoting image) OPI of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image protrusion movement effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the operation portion image protrusion movement effect B. FIG. The operation portion image protrusion movement effect B is mainly different from the operation portion image protrusion movement effect A of FIG. 53 in the movement mode of the button image BB. The hold icon movement effect of FIG. 54 (A) is substantially the same as FIG. 53 (A). Here, the hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move downward and out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the reverse button image appearance effect of FIG. 54 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in an upside down and enlarged state. Since the button image BB whose top and bottom is inverted is enlarged and displayed, both left and right ends are out of the frame from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps the effect design.

  Next, the reverse button image left movement effect of FIG. 54 (C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves to the left as it is from the state of FIG. 53B in which the top and bottom are inverted, and as shown in FIG. 54C, the right side of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. The part corresponding to is out of frame from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the button image rotation effect of FIG. 54 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is rotated rightward (clockwise rotation) from the state of FIG. 54C in which the top and bottom are inverted, and is not inverted by way of the state of FIG. 54D. 54 (E). Thereafter, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method. When the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 54 (F) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promoting image) OPI of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image protrusion movement effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion movement effect C. FIG. The hold icon movement effect in FIG. 55 (A) is the same as in FIG. 53 (A). Next, the sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 55 (B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are out of frame from the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the sword tip and the tip of the handle is out of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position in FIG.

  Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 55 (C) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55C, in the sword member image ASI after moving to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out of the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI rotates clockwise by about 45 degrees (clockwise rotation), and stops at an angle (posture) at which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the sword member image movement effect of FIG. 55 (D) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55D, only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after the right rotation is out of the frame from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and stops in a state where only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is out of frame from the display screen 7a.

  Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 55 (E) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI after moving downward is out of the frame from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 55 (F) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promoting image) OPI of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image protrusion movement effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion movement effect D. FIG. The operation part image protrusion movement effect D is mainly different from the operation part image protrusion movement effect C of FIG. 55 in the shape of the sword member image ASI. The sword member 64 has a shape in which the sword tip portion is buried in the outer frame of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 1). The sword member image ASI in FIG. 55 does not include an image representing the sword tip portion in accordance with the actual shape of the sword member 64. On the other hand, the sword member image ASI in FIG. 56 is an image of the entire sword including the sword tip portion in accordance with the ideal shape of the sword member 64. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), reach occurs in the effect symbol variation effect. Here, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C do not move.

  Next, the enlarged sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 56 (B) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is enlarged and the shape changes so as to represent a state in which the sword is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis (sword-side rotation). Production). In other words, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to represent a state in which the sword member 64 is rotating about the longitudinal direction as a rotation axis. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are out of frame from the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the sword tip and the tip of the handle is out of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position in FIG.

  Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 56 (C) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55C, in the sword member image ASI after moving to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55C, the sword member image ASI is displayed in a reduced size and the sword horizontal rotation effect is continued. In addition, an image of the sword tip is displayed on the lower end side of the sword member image ASI. The sword member image ASI rotates about 45 degrees to the right (clockwise rotation), and stops at an angle (position) at which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the sword member image movement effect of FIG. 56 (D) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55D, only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after the right rotation is out of the frame from the display screen 7a, and the sword horizontal rotation effect is continued. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and stops in a state where only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is out of frame from the display screen 7a. The sword horizontal rotation production is also stopped.

  Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 56 (E) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55E, only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is out of the frame from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of the timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 56 (F) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55F, in a state where the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, the button operation promotion image OPI of “Press!” And the timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed. Is displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of the operation part image protrusion movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (B), the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) are in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. As shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (C), after the first display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a and the first display, A second display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that only a portion corresponding to one end portion of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a, and after the second display, FIG. D) As shown in FIG. 54 (E), a part of the button image BB is such that only a part of the button image BB corresponding to the other end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. A third display that is displayed and configured to be executable That. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 56 (B), the portions corresponding to the upper and lower ends of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. As shown in FIGS. 55 (C), (D), and 56 (C) (D) after the first display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a. As described above, the second display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed so that only the portion corresponding to the upper end portion of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a in the sword member image ASI, After the display of 2, as shown in FIGS. 55E and 55E, only the portion corresponding to the lower end of the sword member 64 in the sword member image ASI protrudes from the display screen 7 a. And a third display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed. It is. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the button image so that the portion corresponding to the left end portion of the effect button 63 in the button image BB protrudes from the display screen 7 a. In the second display in which a part of BB is displayed, a part of the button image BB is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the right side of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. In the third display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the part corresponding to the end part protrudes from the display screen 7a, a part of the button image BB is displayed at the right end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the button image BB of the third display is displayed at a position away from the position displayed in the second display in the right direction. According to this configuration, the player can be further impressed with a novel effect, and the entertainment can be improved.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper end of the display screen 7a in the second display shown in FIGS. 55 (C) (D) and 56 (C) (D). In the third display shown in FIGS. 55E and 55E, a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the sword member image ASI in the third display is displayed at a position away from the position displayed in the second display. Also with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the button image BB of the second display shown in FIG. 53C is displayed in a reduced size than a part of the button image BB of the first display shown in FIG. ing. According to this configuration, the player can be further impressed with a novel effect, and the entertainment can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to represent a state in which the sword member 64 rotates with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, the player can be further impressed with a novel effect, and the entertainment can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, in the third display, the timer image TN is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be further impressed with a novel effect, and the entertainment can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53E and 54E, the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button image BB. Also, as shown in FIGS. 55E and 56E, the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the sword member image ASI. According to this configuration, the player can be further impressed with a novel effect, and the entertainment can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the operation part image protrusion movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect is performed using the sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image representing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63 and the sword member 64. Moreover, you may use the image of arbitrary operation parts, such as a handle image, a lever image, and a trigger image. In addition to the operation unit image, an arbitrary image such as a specific character, graphic, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may change so as to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally. The sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 55 is similar to the sword member image ASI in FIG. You may do it.

[Modification 3]
The timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 53 to 56 is a countdown method, but may be a countup method. Further, the timer image TN does not have to overlap the operation unit images such as the button image BB and the sword member image ASI.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the operation part image protrusion movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the operation part image protrusion movement effects A to D may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, or other effects may be added. Further, the operation unit image protrusion movement effects A to D are not limited to FIGS. 53 to 56 with respect to the operation unit image, the decorative design, and the position and movement direction of the hold icon, and may be any position and movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
A first display in which a part of the first image is displayed on the display means so that portions corresponding to both ends of the operation means are protruded from the display means in the first image; After the first display, a part of the first image is such that only a portion of the first image corresponding to one end of the operation means protrudes from the display means. After the second display to be displayed and the second display, only a portion of the first image corresponding to the other end of the operation means is in a state of protruding from the display means. A gaming machine capable of executing a third display in which a part of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect A3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second display, a part of the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means;
In the third display, a part of the first image is displayed at a second position separated from the first position in a first direction.
[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
A part of the first image displayed in the second display is displayed smaller than a part of the first image displayed in the first display.
[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
A gaming machine, wherein a part of the first image displayed in the first display changes in shape so as to represent a state in which the operation means is rotated.
[Aspect A3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the third display, a timer image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-5,
In the third display, the timer image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.

  The operation part image protrusion display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This operation part image protrusion display effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect or the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation portion image protrusion display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation part image protrusion display effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion display effect A. FIG. In the operation portion image protrusion display effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect of FIG. 57 (A) is executed. The hold icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (hold icon) 9C move rightward and out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57B, a button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right end portions of the effect button 63 are out of the display screen 7a (extruded). In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps the effect design.

  Next, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 57 (D) is executed. Specifically, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the button image BB. The character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of “Press !!!!” and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Operation part image protrusion display effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion display effect B. The operation part image protrusion display effect B is different from the operation part image protrusion display effect A of FIG. 57 in the range of the frame-out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged. 58A and 58B are the same as FIGS. 57A and 57B.

  As shown in FIG. 58C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the button image BB, a portion corresponding to an annular receiving portion provided around the protruding portion, not the protruding portion (convex portion) of the effect button 63 is out of the frame from the display screen 7a ( Protruding). The effect button 63 includes not only the protruding portion but also an annular receiving portion around the protruding portion. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 58C as well, it can be said that portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 58 (D) is executed. Specifically, when the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed. It is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation part image protrusion display effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion display effect C. FIG. The operation part image protrusion display effect C is different from the operation part image protrusion display effect A of FIG. 57 in the range of a frame-out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged. 59A and 59B are the same as FIGS. 57A and 57B.

  As shown in FIG. 59C, the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, a portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left end portion of the effect button 63 is out of the display screen 7a (extruded). Thereafter, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 59 (D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portion corresponding to the left end portion of the effect button 63 is out of the frame from the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are buttons. It is displayed on the image BB.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of the operation part image protrusion display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), 58 (D), and 59 (D), a portion corresponding to at least one end of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. Is configured to be able to execute the first effect in which the timer bar TBI is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D) and 58 (D), in the first effect, portions of the button image BB corresponding to both ends of the effect button 63 are display screens. A part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to protrude from 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), 58 (D), and 59 (D), in the first effect, the timer bar TBI overlaps with a part of the button image BB. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the first effect, a decorative design is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button image BB. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the operation part image protrusion display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, an effect using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect is performed using the sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image representing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63, such as the sword member 64, for example. Moreover, you may use the image of arbitrary operation parts, such as a handle image, a lever image, and a trigger image. In addition to the operation unit image, an arbitrary image such as a specific character, graphic, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The button image BB shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may change its shape so as to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may be displayed in appropriate combination. In addition, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, or other contents of effects may be added. Further, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 57 to 59 with respect to the operation unit image, the decorative design, and the position and movement direction of the hold icon, and may be any position and movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an operation reception period of the operation means,
In a state in which a part of the first image is displayed on the display unit so that a portion corresponding to at least one end of the operation unit of the first image protrudes from the display unit. The gaming machine is capable of executing a first effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A4-2]
A gaming machine according to A4-1,
In the first effect, the display means includes a part of the first image so that portions of the first image corresponding to both end portions of the operation means protrude from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by that is displayed.
[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to A4-1 or A4-2,
In the first effect, the second image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.
[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first display, a decoration symbol is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.

  The hold icon / operation unit image moving effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This hold icon / operation unit image moving effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon / operation unit image move effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect that is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon / operation part image movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A. As shown in FIG. 60A, hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, and effect button 63 (FIG. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 60 (B) is executed. Specifically, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move to the right and out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a, the button image BI1 moves to the right from the lower left position of the display screen 7a. E) Stop at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 60 (A) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60F, the SP reach effect is executed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / Operation part image movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B. The hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B is compared with the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A of FIG. 60, the hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B, the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C, and The operation mode of the button image BB is different.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, and effect button 63 ( A button image BI1 representing the appearance of FIG. 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 61 (B) is executed. Specifically, among the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C, only the hold icon 9B moves to the right, as shown in FIG. 61 (C). Frame out from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the button image BI1 moves downward from the position near the right middle of the display screen 7a and stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61 (E). . That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the hold image (hold icon) 9B was displayed in FIG. 61 (A) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the SP reach effect is executed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / Operation section image movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect C. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold digest image) are displayed on the hold display area image HA. Icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 62 (B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62C, the sword tip portion of the sword member image ASI overlaps the hold display area image HA and becomes invisible. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if stabbed in the hold display area image HA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62D, the entire hold display area image H including the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C is moved downward and displayed. While moving out of the frame from the screen 7a, the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the sword member image ASI stops at the lower left of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIGS. 62D and 62E, the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move downward to frame out from the display screen 7a. At the same time, the sword member image ASI moves to the position where the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 62 (C) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the SP reach effect is executed in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / Operation section image move effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D. In FIG. 63A, similarly to FIG. 62A, the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and A reserved digest image (the reserved icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 63 (B) is executed. Specifically, the sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves to the left oblique direction. The sword tip portion is stopped and displayed in a state where it is out of the display screen 7a. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if stabbed at the left end of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 63C and 63D, the entire holding display area image H including the holding images (holding icons) 9A and 9B and the holding digest image (the holding icon) 9C is leftward. Move and frame out from the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 63E, a sword member image movement effect is executed in which the sword member image ASI moves downward from the vicinity of the left center of the display screen 7a and stops. That is, in the sword member image movement effect, the sword member image ASI moves to the position where the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. Then stop. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the SP reach effect is executed in a state where the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon and an operation part image movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The first effect in which the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C move to the right as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60D, the button image BI1 moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display screen 7a and stops at the position where the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are located. Production is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and hold digested image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, near the center right of display screen 7a. The first effect in which the button image BI1 is displayed and the hold icon 9B moves to the right as shown in FIG. 61 (B), and the button image BI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (D). The second effect of moving from the center right vicinity of the screen 7a to the lower right and stopping at the position where the hold icon 9B was present is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (C), hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and hold digested image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, near the center left of display screen 7a. The first effect in which the sword member image ASI is displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C, and the sword member image ASI move downward, The icons 9A and 9B and the second effect that stops at the position where the hold icon 9C is located are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (B), hold images (hold icon) 9A and 9B and hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, and a sword is displayed at the left end of display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 63C, the first effect in which the member image ASI is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63C, the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C move leftward. As described above, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the second effect that stops at the position where the hold icon 9C is located are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with another image (for example, the operation unit image), and the hold icon moves and the other image is displayed. Move to the position with the hold icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit image such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI is displayed together with other images (for example, a hold icon) on the display screen 7a. As the other image moves, the operation unit image moves to the position where the other image exists. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. To start. As shown in FIG. 61, the button image BI1 starts moving after the hold icon 9B disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the operation unit images such as the button image BI <b> 1 and the sword member image ASI move to the position where the hold icon was located after the hold icon was moved, Stop at that position. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the button image BI1 moves in a direction different from the moving direction of the hold icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a hold icon and an operation part image movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1 or the sword member image ASI), and the hold icon is moved and the operation unit is moved. The image moves to the position with the hold icon. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using the hold icon and a specific image other than the operation unit image. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. That is, the gaming machine 1 performs an effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, and the hold icon moves and the specific image moves to the position where the hold icon is located. Also good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit image such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the hold icon, and the hold icon moves and the operation unit image is held. Move to the position where the icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using the operation unit image and a specific image other than the hold icon. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. That is, the gaming machine 1 displays a specific image other than the hold icon on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image, and performs an effect in which the specific image moves and the operation unit image moves to a position where the specific image is located. May be. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using the first specific image other than the hold icon and the second specific image other than the operation unit image. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the first specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the second specific image other than the operation unit image, and the first specific image moves and the second specific image is the first specific image. You may perform the effect which moves to the position with the image. The first specific image and the second specific image are images including arbitrary characters such as character images, figures, symbols, and the like. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, an effect is performed using an operation unit image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image representing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the above as the operation unit image. For example, the operation unit image may be an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 5]
The display contents of the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, or other effects may be added. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D are not limited to those shown in FIGS. Good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, and the first image is the first image. And a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position to the first position while moving in the first direction.
[Aspect B1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2 further includes
It has operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspect B1-1 to aspect B1-3,
In the second effect, the second image is moved from the second position after the first image has moved from the first position in the first direction and disappeared from the display unit. A game machine characterized by starting to move to a first position.
[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B1-1 to Aspect B1-4,
In the second effect, the second image stops at the first position after moving from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B1-1 to Aspect B1-5,
In the second performance, the second image moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment can also be realized in the following manner.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, and the first image is the first image. And a second effect in which the second image moves in the second direction from the second position while moving in the first direction.
[Aspect B2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2 further includes
It has operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, the second image is moved in the second direction after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by starting to move.
[Aspect B2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
In the second performance, the second image moves from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B2-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B2-5,
In the second effect, the second image stops at the first position after moving from the second position to the first position.

  The hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect can be executed during the execution of the change effect, particularly immediately before the start of change of the decorative symbol or immediately after the stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90, the image control microcomputer 101 is executed based on the content of the variation effect start command and the reserved ball number command received before that.

[Hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect A. As shown in FIG. 64A, hold images (hold icon) 9A, 9B and hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below display screen 7a, and effect button 63 (FIG. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped (determined) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 64 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A on the rightmost side of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves diagonally upward to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible. As described above, in this specification, “images overlap” means that they appear to be overlapped as viewed from the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, if at least a part of the first hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a appears missing from the button image BI1, it can be said that the images overlap.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 64 (C) is executed. Specifically, the movement of the first hold icon 9A causes the entire first hold icon 9A to overlap the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first hold icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 64 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears from a part of the button image BI1 while moving in the lower right direction. Thereafter, the hold position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon appearing from a part of the button image BI1 moves in the lower right direction as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon 9C is arranged. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the decorative design variation effect is started.

[Hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect B. The hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect B is different from the superimposing effect A of FIG. 64 in that the hold image (hold icon) 9B is not displayed, the position of the button image BB, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the hold image (hold icon) 9A and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed between the reserved position and the reserved position. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped (determined) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 65 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves in the right direction. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. Specifically, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first hold icon appearance effect shown in FIG. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears while moving in the right direction from the right side of the button image BI1. That is, the first hold icon 9A appears from the opposite side (the right side of the button image BI1) to the position (the left side of the button image BI1) that was before being hidden by the button image BI1. Thereafter, the hold position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 65 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon appearing from the right end of the button image BI1 moves to the right as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon is arranged. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the decorative design variation effect is started.

[Hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect C. In the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect C, the hold icon 9C is not displayed, and the button image BB is the hold position.

  As shown in FIG. 66A, a hold icon 9A and a button image BI1 are displayed below the display screen 7a. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 66 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves in the right direction. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

  Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 66 (C) is executed. Specifically, when the first hold icon 9A moves to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire one hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the button image emission effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BI1 emits light in a specific color to indicate that the state is equivalent to the case where the hold icon is located at the hold position. This button image light emission effect is equivalent to the hold position movement completion effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the decorative design variation effect is started.

[Example of effects]
The following shows an example of the effect of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A is the position of the button image BI1. And a second effect that is hidden from view by overlapping with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the first hold icon 9A is removed from the button image BI1 after the second effect that the first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 and cannot be seen. The third effect that appears is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A is the first hold icon before moving in the button image BI1. It is configured to appear from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) facing the position where 9A is located. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the third effect that the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A stops at the hold position. 4 effects can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the hold icon overlaps with another image (here, the button image BI1) to produce an effect that cannot be seen. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, another image (here, the hold icon) moves toward the button image BI1, and the other image appears to overlap the button image BI1. Since the lost production is executed, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a variation of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second effect that becomes invisible with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1. However, in the gaming machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1), the specific image moves toward the position of the operation unit image, and the operation unit image You may perform the production | presentation which overlaps with the operation part image in a position and becomes invisible. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second effect that becomes invisible with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1. However, in the gaming machine 1, the first hold icon 9A is displayed together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the specific image, and the specific hold position is specified at the position of the specific image. You may perform the production which overlaps with an image and becomes invisible. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the button image BI1 is shown as an example of the operation unit image in FIGS. 64 to 66, but an operation unit image other than the button image may be used. The operation unit image may be, for example, a sword member image, a sword button image, or a select button image.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image superimposing effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, and other contents of the effects may be added. Further, the holding icon / operation unit image superimposing effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 64 to 66 with respect to the operation unit image, the decorative design, and the position and moving direction of the holding icon, but may be in any position and moving direction. Good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, and the first image is the first image. A game machine that is capable of executing a second effect that moves from the position toward the second position and disappears at the second position and overlaps with the second image.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 further includes
After the second effect, the third effect in which the first image appears from the second image can be executed.
[Aspect B3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image of the third effect appears from a side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3 further includes
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the first image stops at the third position can be executed.
[Aspect B3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B3-1 to Aspect B3-4,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B3-1 to Aspect B3-5,
It has operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operation means.

  The hold icon non-display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This hold icon non-display effect can be executed during decoration effect change effect or reach effect (super reach effect). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 can receive and display a pre-change end command from the sub-control board 90 as one of the pre-read effects.

[Hold icon non-display effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect A. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A below the display screen 7a is displayed. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel images PN. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icons 9A are displayed on the first to third panel images PN from the right, respectively, and the leftmost panel image PN is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed. Hereinafter, in the panel represented by the panel image PN, the surface on which the hold icon 9A is displayed is referred to as “front surface”, and the opposite surface is also referred to as “back surface”. In FIG. 67A, the hold icon 9C is also displayed on another panel image different from the panel image PN.

  The panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 67B is executed at a specific timing during the change. Specifically, in any panel image PN among the panel images PN on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, the first to third panel images PN from the right of the four panel images PN), The image changes so that is in a horizontally rotated state. Then, the hold icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 67 (C) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the image is changed so that the panel is horizontally rotated is an image with the panel turned face down. That is, the panel image PN is an image in which a surface (back surface) opposite to the side where the hold icon 9A is displayed is displayed. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed on the panel image PN is not displayed. That is, in the display area of the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a, the hold icon is visible when the front image is displayed, and the hold icon is not visible when the back image is displayed.

  Next, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) is executed. Specifically, in the panel image PN in which the hold icon 9A is not displayed, the image changes so that the horizontal rotation of the panel is continued as it is, and the surface on the side where the hold icon 9A is displayed again after one round. (Surface) is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the hold icon 9A changes (hold change). FIG. 68 (F) shows a shift effect. After the decorative symbol confirmation display, the hold icon 9A displayed on each panel image PN moves to the right panel image PN one by one. The hold icon 9A displayed on the rightmost panel image PN moves to the panel image on which the hold is displayed and is displayed on the panel.

[Hold icon hiding effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect B. The hold icon non-display effect B is different from the non-display effect A of FIG. 67 in that the frame area image HA is displayed around the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 68A, the frame area image HA is displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. In the frame area image HA, four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed. One panel image is displayed in an area where the hold icon 9C is displayed in the frame area image HA. In other words, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is divided into four areas by the frame area image HA. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel images PN arranged in the area partitioned by the frame area image HA. In the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the first to third panel images PN from the right, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed on the leftmost panel image PN. The operation of each panel image PN is the same as the non-display effect A in FIG.

[Hold icon non-display effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect C. The hold icon non-display effect C is different from the non-display effect A of FIG. 67 in that the pupil frame image EF is displayed instead of the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), four pupil frame images EF are displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A below the display screen 7a is displayed. The hold icon 9A is displayed inside the pupil frame image EF. The hold icon 9A displayed on the inner side of the pupil frame image EF is displayed so as to be a black eye part of the pupil. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right in the display area of the hold icon 9A, and the leftmost pupil frame image. The hold icon 9A is not displayed on the EF. Hereinafter, a state where the eyelid represented by the pupil frame image EF is open and the hold icon 9A is displayed is referred to as an “open state”, and a state where the eyelid is closed and the hold icon 9A is not visually visible is also referred to as a “closed state”. . Here, the hold icon 9C is also displayed in another pupil frame image different from the pupil frame image EF.

  At a specific timing during the change, the closing effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is executed. Specifically, an arbitrary pupil frame image among the pupil frame images EF on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right of the four pupil frame images EF). In EF, the image changes so that the eyelid image appears and the eyes are closed. Then, the hold icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF whose image is changed so as to close the eyes is an image in a state where the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (closed state). That is, the pupil frame image EF is an image in which the black-eye hold icon 9A is completely hidden by eyelids. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed in the pupil frame image EF is not displayed.

  Next, the opening effect shown in FIG. 69 (D) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in a state where the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (closed state) changes again so that the eyelids are opened again. When the closed state is changed to the opened state, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the hold icon 9A changes (hold change). FIG. 69 (F) shows a shift effect. After the decorative symbol confirmation display, the hold icon 9A displayed in each pupil frame image EF moves to the right pupil frame image EF one by one. The hold icon 9A displayed in the rightmost pupil frame image EF moves to the pupil frame image in which the hold is displayed, and is displayed as a black eye portion of the pupil frame image.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon non-display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the panel image PN displays the surface of the panel in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed. When the back side of the panel is displayed, the hold icon 9A is not visible. As shown in FIG. 69, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the open state, and the hold icon 9A becomes invisible when the pupil frame image EF is in the closed state. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the hold icon 9A is The image PN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the surface of the panel. As shown in FIG. 69, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the open state, the hold icon 9A overlaps with a part (white eye portion) of the pupil frame image EF. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the panel image PN representing the front surface of the panel, and then the panel image PN is switched to display on the back surface of the panel, It is possible to execute the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is not visible. As shown in FIG. 69, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the pupil frame image EF representing the open state, and then the pupil frame image EF is switched to the closed state display, and the hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the first effect that the hold icon 9A is not visible, the panel image PN is switched from the back surface of the panel to the front display, and the hold is no longer visible. A second effect in which the icon 9A is displayed again can be executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 69, after the first effect that the hold icon 9A is not visible, the pupil frame image EF is switched from the closed state to the open state display, and the hold icon 9A that is no longer visible is displayed again. The second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, when the hold icon 9A that has disappeared is displayed again, there is an effect that the hold icon 9A changes (holds change) from the state before it disappears. Executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, each display area of the hold icon 9A is partitioned by a frame area image HA. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the hold icon non-display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, the frame area image HA is not displayed, but the frame area image HA may be displayed. Moreover, the structure which a shutter opens and closes instead of a bag may be sufficient.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the hold icon non-display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon non-display effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, or other contents of effects may be added. Further, the hold icon non-display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 67 to 69 with respect to the decorative symbol, the position and the movement direction of the hold icon, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
One of the first display and the second display can be displayed in each display area where each hold icon is displayed,
In the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon can be displayed,
In the display area where the second display is displayed, the hold icon becomes invisible.
[Aspect B4-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-1,
When the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display. .
[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
After the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the display in the display area is switched from the first display to the second display, and the hold icon becomes invisible. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute one production.
[Aspect B4-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-3,
After the first effect, the display of the display area is switched from the second display to the first display, and the second effect can be executed in which the hold icon that has disappeared is displayed again. A gaming machine.
[Aspect B4-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-4,
In the second effect, an effect that changes from a state before the held icon that is displayed again disappears is executed.
[Aspect B4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B4-1 to Aspect B4-5,
Each of the display areas is partitioned by a frame image.

  The operation count effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation count effect is performed in parallel with the decorative symbol variation effect. Of course, this includes during execution such as reach production (super reach production).

[Operation count effect A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect A.
First, in the operation count effect A, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70C, a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect is stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70D, a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG. Then, the countdown is displayed in the order of “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70E, a count effect (final period) is executed. In the count effect (final stage), “0” is displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG. This is a display following “1” in the countdown display described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction effect, an image instructing to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “Press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (success)]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (success).
First, in the operation count effect B (success), a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG showing the sword button 65. Then, a countdown display is performed in the button image BG in the order of “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”. At this time, the characters “Wai ...” are displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), a count effect (final period) is executed. In the count effect (final stage), “0” is displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG. This is a display following “1” in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters “Wai ...” are displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction effect, an image instructing to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “Press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (failure)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (failure).
First, in the operation count effect B (failure), a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72D, a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), “5” is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG showing the sword button 65. Then, a countdown display is performed in the button image BG, such as “5” → “4”. At this time, the characters “Wai ...” are displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG.
72 (A) to 72 (D) are similar to the operation count effect B (success) shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72E, a count effect (middle period) is executed. In the count effect (middle period), “3” is displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG. This is a display following “4” in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters “Wai ...” are displayed in the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the variation continuation effect is executed. In the variation continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the same effect as the variation start effect shown in FIG. That is, the countdown display is interrupted at “3”, and the same effect as the change start effect is performed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown display is performed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes “0”, a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) and 71 (E). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect an operation of the sword button 65 by performing a countdown display using a part of the sword image KG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a countdown display is performed over the button image BG of the sword image KG. When the countdown display becomes “0”, a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (E). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the operation of the sword button 65 by counting down on the button image BG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a countdown is displayed over the button image BG of the sword image KG, and “Wai ...” is displayed on the pattern portion EG of the sword image KG. Is displayed. According to this structure, operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the countdown display superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG disappears in the middle, the variation continuation effect as shown in FIG. And the button press instruction effect as shown in FIG. 71 (E) is not performed. According to this configuration, the game can be widened and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen. According to this structure, an unexpectedness can be given to a player and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown display is performed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes “0”, a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70E and 71E, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the button press instruction effect may be executed even if the countdown display does not become “0”.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is possible to count up instead of counting down.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the display may not be a count display, and a time display such as “5 seconds remaining” may be performed at a certain timing.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A display device capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
A game machine that uses a part of an image of the operation means to display a time until the operation means becomes operable.
[Aspect B5-2]
A gaming machine, wherein a time display until the operation means can be operated is displayed superimposed on an image showing a movable portion of the operation means.
[Aspect B5-3]
The time until the operation unit becomes operable is displayed, and another part of the image of the operation unit is used to display that the operation of the operation unit is suspended. A gaming machine.
[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation means cannot be operated when the time display ends in the middle.
[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine, wherein when displaying the time until the operation means becomes operable, an image of the operation means is displayed at a corner portion of the display means.

  The timer image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This timer image movement effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer image movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect A. FIG. In the timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 73 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach design of decorative symbols. Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps the first button image BI1, and slides to the left at a predetermined timing.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides to the left, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and a part thereof overlaps the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 73 (C) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA further slides leftward, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position. In addition, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed. After the light emission effect is started, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 that appears from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other and partially overlap with the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 73 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the wall image HA, a character image (button operation) for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation) (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect B. FIG. In the timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 74 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the first button image BI1 is arranged on the stage image ST. The stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are deformed so that the stereoscopic image of the button and the stage rotates horizontally at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, this deformation of the image is also referred to as a horizontal rotation effect.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 74 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST along with the lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 that appears from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position with the restart of the lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. Along with the horizontal rotation effect, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed. After the light emission effect starts, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, in the second timer image TN2 that appears from the right side of the stage image ST, the lateral rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and is stopped and displayed at the first position. . At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image (button) of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. Operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 74F, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect C. FIG. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 75 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves in the left direction, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. In addition, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed. After the light emission effect is started, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

  Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 75 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 that appears from the right side of the display screen 7a moves leftward and is connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 was initially connected. Thus, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 75 (E) is executed. Specifically, in the state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a timer image movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first effect in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, After the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 was displayed. And is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (B), 74 (B), and 75 (B), the first timer image TN1 when the first timer image is displayed is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 when the second timer image is displayed is the second timer image TN2. And is adjacent. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 when the second timer image is displayed is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (C), 74 (C), and 75 (C), before the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position, the first The light emission effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation unit (the effect button 63 in this case) of the gaming machine 1. Yes. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer image movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 can be executed. However, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect using an image having an appearance shape of the operation unit different from the effect button 63 instead of the first button image BI1. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be an arbitrary image other than the button image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
The timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 73 to 75 is a countdown method, but may be a countup method. Also, the timer image TN does not have to be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 may be displayed in appropriate combination. In addition, the timer image movement effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, or other contents of effects may be added. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 73 to 75 with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decorative design, and the hold icon, and may be any position and movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image,
A first effect in which the first timer image is displayed at a first position in a state where the first image is displayed on the display means, and the first timer after the first effect. A gaming machine, wherein an image is displayed at a second position and the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the first performance, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
In the second performance, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
In the second effect, a predetermined effect using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 is further provided.
It has operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operation means.

  The timer image tilt display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This timer image tilt display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the timer image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect A. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect A, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 76 (A) is executed. The first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and a fan-shaped region image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The area image SC is different in color from other parts of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a lower right predetermined position (first position) on the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the fan-shaped region image SC and is displayed obliquely as compared to when it is displayed at the first position. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 76 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position on the area image SC to the upper left, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. Is done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the region image SC and is displayed with an inclination of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 76 (D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the region image SC and is displayed obliquely as compared to when it was displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the region image SC, and is displayed with an inclination of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an expansion effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 76 (E) is executed. Specifically, in the state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image (button operation) for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation) (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect B. In the timer image tilt display effect B, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 77 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is located above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation) at the first position. Thereby, the first timer image TN1 is displayed obliquely compared to the state at the time of appearing on the display screen 7a. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 77 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 is displayed, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second position near the right center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by approximately 90 degrees at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 77 (D) is executed. Specifically, similar to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation) at the second position, and is displayed obliquely compared to the state at the time of appearing on the display screen 7a. Is done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed with an inclination of about 90 degrees or more compared to the state at the time of appearing on the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an expansion effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 77 (E) is executed. Specifically, in the state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image (button operation) for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (button operation) (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect C, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 78 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position (first position) adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

  Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely as compared to when it was displayed at the first position. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 78 (C) is executed. Specifically, a first position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1 at a predetermined timing after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the upper left along the first button image BI1. The second timer image TN2 is displayed. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1, and is displayed with an inclination of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

  Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 78 (D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. The At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed with an inclination of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an expansion effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

  When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 78 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 that are in contact with the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of “Press!” For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Example of effects]
An example of the effect of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 (B), 77 (B), and 78 (B), the first timer image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first timer A first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed with a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1 is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, in the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effect shown in FIG. 76 (B), FIG. 77 (B), FIG. 78 (B), FIG. 76 (C), FIG. 77 (C), FIG. As shown to C), it is comprised so that the 2nd production in which the 1st timer image TN1 inclined at the angle different from the time of the 1st production is displayed can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation unit (the effect button 63 in this case) of the gaming machine 1. Yes. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the countdown value displayed in the first timer image TN1 becomes a predetermined value as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) (E), 78 (D) (E). In addition, a third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 changes can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress a player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer image inclination display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 can be executed. However, the gaming machine 1 may execute the same effect using an image having an appearance shape of the operation unit different from the effect button 63 instead of the first button image BI1. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including an arbitrary character such as a character image, a figure, a symbol, or the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be an arbitrary image other than the button image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect and to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
The timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 is a countdown method, but may be a countup method. 76 to 78 may be adjacent to the button image BI1 or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Also, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 76 to 78 may be adjacent to each other or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 may be displayed in appropriate combination. Further, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, or other effects may be added. In addition, the timer image tilt display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 76 to 78 with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decorative design, and the hold icon, and may be any position and movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
A first effect in which the timer image is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image in a state where the first image is displayed on the display means. Machine.
[Aspect C2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
In the first performance, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
After the first effect, the second effect in which the timer image tilted at an angle different from that at the time of the first effect can be executed.
[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
It has operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operation means.
[Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
A gaming machine, wherein a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes can be executed when the countdown value displayed on the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

  The timer button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer button effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect (during one change effect) (for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect)) or during a jackpot game.

[Timer button production A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect A. FIG.
In the timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the first button display effect is executed. In the first button display effect, the button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3B and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image C3B shown in FIG. 79 (B), “50 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79C, the second button display effect is executed. In the second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image C3C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and an image representing a state in which the button image C3A is darkened and / or the button image C3A is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image C3C, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. In the timer image C3B, the timer value is “0 seconds”. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B becomes “0 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed after a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value becomes “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A when the effective operation period has passed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the accessory movable effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. This accessory movable effect is an effect in which the movable board 15 is controlled to move to the unfolded position and is arranged on the display screen 7a (a position where the display screen 7a is hidden). This action movable effect functions as a chance up.

[Timer button effect B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect B. FIG.
In the timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80A, the first button display effect is executed as in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3D and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down, and is arranged in the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (B), “30 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80C, the second button display effect is executed. In the second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3D are displayed. In the timer image C3D, the timer value “0 seconds” is indicated in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D becomes “0 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed after a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value becomes “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A when the effective operation period has passed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80D, a re-timer display effect is executed in response to the effect button 63 being pressed by the player. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is performed again, that is, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. In this case, as in FIG. 80B, the timer image C3D is arranged in the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (D), “50 seconds” that is longer than the case of FIG. 80 (B) is shown as the timer initial value. Thereby, it can be suggested that the retimer display effect has a high expectation degree of jackpot.

  In the timer display effects in the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D. For example, as the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, and the second pattern is more than the first pattern. Long 70 seconds and 50 seconds are set. In this case, when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than when the second pattern is set. As the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D, when displaying with the first pattern and when displaying with the second pattern, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of timer button effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effects A and B, the timer image is displayed, and after the timer image is displayed. In response to the timer value of the timer image becoming a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, and can suppress the pressing timing of the effect button 63 from being missed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the player in the game effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuation effect, the player can change the button image without error from the timer display. It can be recognized, and missed pressing timing of the effect button 63 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the player in the game effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed, and after the timer image C3D is displayed, the timer image In response to the C3D timer value reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C is displayed prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, A re-timer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display, and can suppress the pressing timing of the effect button 63, and the timer display is displayed again after the effect button 63 is pressed. Since it is executed, a surprise can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation of the player while improving the participation rate of the player in the game effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed in the button image C3A. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player strongly foresee an effect (such as a button press effect) related to the effect button 63 by the timer display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, a chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second pattern is set, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the first pattern is set. . According to this configuration, a chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer button effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed by the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, an accessory movable effect and a retimer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect but the effect button 63 is not pressed down by the player, the accessory movable effect or the retimer display effect is executed. Also good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the timer button effects A and B May be executed across a plurality of variation effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effects shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. May be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described timeout display effect can be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second pattern is set, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer button effects A and B, when the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed, the timer image is displayed in a first color (for example, blue), and the second color ( For example, when the second color is set rather than when the first color is set, each of them functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). However, it may be configured to have a high expectation degree of jackpot.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed by the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, an accessory movable effect and a retimer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, a pseudo-ream effect, a jackpot notice effect, a reach development destination notice effect, a jackpot expectation degree according to the press. An effect such as an suggestion effect, a pending change notice, or a prefetch start notice may be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
An operation unit that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation part image representing the operation part,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a first timer display,
The third display effect is an effect that displays an operation part image representing the operation part and a second operation part image that prompts the player to operate the operation part.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value. Depending on the situation, the third display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
A symbol display means capable of performing symbol variation display to be stopped after starting symbol variation display,
The combination effect may be performed during one symbol variation display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, which is characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-3]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, the fourth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in a region where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect includes a timer display of one aspect of a plurality of timer displays including a timer display of the first aspect and a timer display of the second aspect. Done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, the second display effect functions as a second chance up display having a higher jackpot expectation than the first chance up display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is the first length,
The timer display of the second aspect of the first timer display is a second length in which an initial value of the timer value is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5, which is characterized in that.

  The timer pseudo-continuous effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during decoration effect variation effect (during one variation effect), for example, at the time of start of decoration symbol change, during reach effect, or the like.

[Timer pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo-continuous effect A.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image C4A shown in FIG. 81 (A), “15 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a button press effect A is executed. In the button press effect A, a button image C4B and a timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image C4B is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is expressed as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image C4D is darkened and / or an image representing a state as if the button image C4D is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image C4B, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. In the timer image C4A, the timer value is “0 second”. The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes “0 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed after a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value becomes “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the effective operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a pseudo-continuous effect A is executed. In the pseudo continuous effect A, a pseudo continuous suggestion image C4C is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestion image C4C is an image reminiscent of the pseudo-continuous presentation, and specifically, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the pseudo-continuous presentation is the second time is shown. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of “7, logo design, 7” in the decorative design.
After the pseudo-continuous effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation suggestion production), jackpot notice production, reach development ahead notice production, pending change notice, or pre-reading start notice are executed. obtain.
Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of fluctuation change or during reach effect, for example, an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, or a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol An effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops at least a part, an effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-relation such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”, Includes an effect to execute a decorative design variation effect.

[Timer pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo-continuous effect B.
In the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82A, a timer button display effect A is executed. In this timer button display effect A, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed. The timer image C4A is the same as the timer image C4A in FIG. 81A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and “15 seconds” is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a button press effect A is executed as in FIG. 81 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82C, a pseudo-continuous effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82D, a timer button display effect B is executed. In the timer button display effect B, the timer image C4A and the button image C4D are displayed in the timer button display effect B. The button image C4D is the same as the button image C4D in FIG. The timer image C4A shows “30 seconds” as an initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), a button press effect B is executed as in FIG. 82 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), the pseudo-continuous effect B is executed. In the pseudo continuous effect B, a pseudo continuous suggestion image C4E is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestion image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-continuous production, and specifically shows “pseudo × 3” that suggests that the pseudo-continuous production is the third time. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of “7, logo design, 7” in the decorative design.
After the pseudo-continuous effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation suggestion production), jackpot notice production, reach development ahead notice production, pending change notice, or pre-reading start notice are executed. obtain.

  In the timer display effects in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, a plurality of patterns of timer initial values of the timer image C4A are prepared. For example, as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds as shown in FIG. 82, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds longer than the first pattern. In this case, in the timer display effect, the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B is obtained when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A than when the first pattern is set. That is, after the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again is high. When displaying with the first pattern as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A and when displaying with the second pattern, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Example of effects]
An example of the effect of the timer pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). Accordingly, a button image C4B that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of surprise rather than simply executing a pseudo-continuous effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, a button image C4D and a timer image C4A are displayed, which suggest that a button effect using the effect button 63 will be performed from now on. In response to the timer value of the timer image C4A reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), the button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the player has pressed the effect button 63. In response to this, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, it is possible to predict the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and to give a thrilling feeling to the progress of the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuation effect, the player can recognize the change of the button image without error from the timer display. Missing the pressing timing of the button 63 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the player in the game effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, the timer button display effect is executed again after the execution of the pseudo continuous effect A in the timer pseudo continuous effect B (see FIG. 82D). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to give a sense of expectation that the pseudo-continuous production will be realized again, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up production (chance-up display). According to this configuration, a chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second pattern is set rather than when the first pattern is set, the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B is obtained, that is, After the quasi-continuous effect, the probability that the quasi-continuous effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again is high. According to this configuration, a chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer pseudo | simulation continuous production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button image C4B is displayed by the button pressing effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the player does not press the effect button 63 despite the button image C4B being displayed in the button press effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A , B may be executed across a plurality of fluctuating effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described timeout display effect can be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern and may be displayed in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second pattern is set rather than when the first pattern is set, the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B is obtained, that is, Although the probability that a pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again after the pseudo-continuous effect is high, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, when the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed, the timer image is displayed in a first color (for example, blue) and the second color (for example, for example) , And gold), each of which functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second color is set rather than when the first color is set The probability of the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, that is, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82F) is performed again after the pseudo-continuous effect may be high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two timer images are displayed. You may make it display the above timer image simultaneously.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first timer display,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an operation unit image representing the operation unit and displaying a first operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
The third display effect is a pseudo-continuous effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed in response to the timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect becoming a predetermined value. The third display effect may be performed in response to the player operating the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C4-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation part image representing the operation part,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C4-3]
A symbol display means capable of performing symbol variation display to be stopped after starting symbol variation display,
The combination effect may be performed during one symbol variation display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C4-4]
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect may be performed after the third display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect includes a timer display of one aspect of a plurality of timer displays including a timer display of the first aspect and a timer display of the second aspect. Done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. Function as a second chance-up display with a higher expectation than the first chance-up display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C4-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is the first length,
In the timer display of the second aspect of the timer display, the initial value of the timer value is a second length longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5, which is characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This on-hold change effect is performed in parallel with the decorative symbol variation effect. Of course, including the execution of reach production (super reach production).

[Pending change production A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect A. The hold change effect A is executed as one of the prefetch effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the above-described prefetch effect patterns A and B. The hold change effect A has two modes based on the prefetch effect pattern.

  First, in the hold change effect A, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  As one aspect following the variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled “Change” is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, a change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), such an effect that the change image CG1 is sucked into the reserved image HGW that is one of the reserved images 9A is performed. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white. This hold image HGW corresponds to the target hold of the prefetch effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the hold change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to a blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

  On the other hand, as another aspect following the variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), a change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled “Change” is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), a change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), such an effect that the change image CG2 is sucked into the reserved image HGW that is one of the reserved images 9A is performed. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to a red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Hold change effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect B. FIG. The hold change effect B is executed as one of the prefetch effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the above-described prefetch effect patterns A and B.

  First, in the hold change effect B, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled “Change” is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, a change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), such an effect that the change image CG1 is sucked into the reserved image HGW that is one of the reserved images 9A is performed. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the hold change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to a blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a change display effect (1) in which the change image CG1 is displayed is executed, as in FIG. 84 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the change movement effect (1) is executed as in FIG. 84 (C), and the change image CG1 is drawn into the hold image HGB changed from the hold image HGW. Is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the blue hold image HGB is changed to red and further to the hold image HGR.

[Hold change effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect C. The hold change effect C is executed as one of the prefetch effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the above-described prefetch effect patterns A and B.

  First, in the hold change effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a reserved image 9A and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button press promotion effect is executed. In the button press promotion effect, a button image BB showing the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a text image TG “continuous hit!” Is displayed together with the button image BB. This prompts the player to hit the effect button 63 repeatedly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled “Change” is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, a button press promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), a change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled “Change” is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red. At this time, a button press promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

  That is, when the player presses the effect button 63 continuously by executing the button press promotion effect, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), a change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), such an effect that the change image CG2 is sucked into the reserved image HGW that is one of the reserved images 9A is performed. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to a red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image labeled “Change” is displayed as a change display effect. The hold image HGW is changed corresponding to the change image. According to this configuration, the change image can be expected to change the hold image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the white reserved image HGW is shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). Is changed to a blue reserved image HGB. When the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the white reserved image HGW is changed to the red reserved image HGR as shown in FIGS. 83 (F) and 83 (G). Can be changed. According to this configuration, the change images CG1 and CG2 that are displayed can be expected to change to the reserved images HGB and HGR, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the white reserved image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D). Is changed to a blue reserved image HGB. Further, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the blue hold image HGB becomes the red hold image HGR as shown in FIGS. 84 (F) and 84 (G). Can be changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect a change to the hold image HGR by displaying the change image CG1 again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a change movement effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 83 (C), (F), 84 (C), (F), and 85 (E). In the change movement effect, in the change movement effect, an effect that the change image is sucked into the reserved image that is one of the reserved images 9A is performed, and the reserved image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a change in the reserved image and improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button press promotion effect is executed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly strikes the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). According to this configuration, since the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by operating the effect button 63, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image labeled “Change” is displayed as a change display effect. The hold image HGW is changed corresponding to the change image. Here, the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are taken as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), it changes to a blue hold image HGB, and as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the red change image is displayed. When CG2 is displayed, it changes to a red hold image HGR. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the change image and the changed hold image. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one reserved image, and one change image may correspond to two or more types of reserved images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button press promotion effect is executed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly strikes the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). On the other hand, the change display effects shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D) may be performed without operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button press promotion effect is executed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly strikes the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). On the other hand, when the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effect shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D) is not performed, and FIG. 85 (F) is continued from FIG. 85 (B). You may make it perform the pending | holding change effect as shown.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a button press promotion effect is executed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly strikes the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). As another aspect to this, it is good also as an effect which does not transfer to the change display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 85 (D) when the effect button 63 is hit repeatedly. In this case, it is conceivable to execute the change movement effect (1) and the hold change effect (1) in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
Display means capable of informing the number of holds by the number of displayed hold images;
A gaming machine comprising a production means capable of performing a plurality of productions,
The effect means is capable of displaying a plurality of change notice images for notifying the change of the reserved image,
The game machine, wherein the reserved image is changed corresponding to the plurality of change notice images.

[Aspect C5-2]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the second change notice image is displayed, the hold image is displayed. A gaming machine, characterized by being changed to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the hold image is changed. A game machine, characterized in that the image is changed to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-4]
The game machine, wherein the displayed change notice image acts on one of the reserved images, and then changes the reserved image.

[Aspect C5-5]
It further comprises operating means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of change notice images are displayed after operation of the operation means.

  The acquired ball number display effect will be described with reference to FIG. This acquired ball number display effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects that the image control microcomputer 101 receives and executes a round designation command from the sub-control board 90.

[Acquired ball number display effect]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball number display effect. In the acquired ball number display effect, first, the winning image display of FIG. 86 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71 that becomes “long opening” in the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). This is executed when at least a part of the subsequent game balls passes through the V region 39. Here, a V winning image WP that suggests that the game ball has passed the V region 39 is displayed. The V winning image WP is an image that suggests that it will be in a highly accurate time-short state later, so it can be said that the V-winning image WP is an image that suggests a gaming state that is advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 86A, the character image CRA1 is displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the currently acquirable number of balls display CGN is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a measure of the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the next round of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71, the currently acquirable ball number display CGN is displayed as a guide for the number of balls that can be acquired in the round game. In FIG. 86 (B), a plurality of right-handed images RD1, RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state in which the currently-acquirable number of balls display CGN is displayed. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images suggesting that the game ball is fired in the right direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), a currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed. The currently acquired number of balls is the number of balls already acquired in the per game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to before the start of the round game is displayed as the currently acquired ball number display AAN. In FIG. 86C, a plurality of right-handed images RD1, RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state where the currently acquired number-of-balls display AAN is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), a currently acquired number-of-balls display AAN and a planned accumulated number-of-balls display TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative number of balls acquired is the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the scheduled cumulative number of balls displayed TPN is displayed adjacent to the current number of balls displayed AAN. In FIG. 86 (D), the scheduled cumulative acquired number of balls display TPN and the current acquired number of balls display AAN are displayed adjacent to each other vertically, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are also displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of the acquired ball number display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86C, the currently acquired number of balls AAN is displayed in a state where a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player both an uplifting feeling by knowing the number of balls already acquired in the jackpot game and a sense of expectation that can be further acquired by right-handed display. Can be planned.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the scheduled accumulated number-of-balls display TPN is displayed adjacent to the current number-of-balls AAN during the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the currently acquired number of balls approaches the planned accumulated number of acquired balls, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the currently acquirable number of balls display CGN is displayed at the start of the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of exaltation by knowing the number of balls that can be acquired in the current round, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the V winning image WP shown in FIG. 86 (A) is displayed before the currently acquirable number of balls display CGN shown in FIG. 86 (B) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the currently acquirable ball number display CGN. According to this configuration, it is possible to give both an uplifting feeling by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in this round and a sense of expectation that it will be realized by right-handed display by right-handed display, thereby improving the interest be able to.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the acquired ball number display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the effect of exemplifying the V winning image is shown as an image that suggests that a gaming state that will be advantageous to the player later is shown. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image other than the V winning image, which suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later, instead of the V winning image. An image other than the V winning image that suggests that the game state will be advantageous to the player later is, for example, an image that suggests that the jackpot game is started or an image that suggests that the jackpot game is started. It is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) and 86 (C), two right-handed images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. The gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images having different sizes. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 86 (D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball number display effect may be executed in a special game other than the jackpot game. For example, it may be executed during a small hit game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that a game ball is fired in a predetermined direction;
In a state where a plurality of the first images are displayed during a winning game, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a currently acquired number of balls representing the number of balls already acquired in the winning game is displayed. A gaming machine.
[Aspect D1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying a scheduled accumulated number of balls representing the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round, adjacent to the display of the currently acquired number of balls during a round game. To play.
[Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, at the start of a round game, a third effect can be executed in which the number of balls that can be acquired this time representing the number of balls that can be acquired in the current round is displayed.
[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image that suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later,
A gaming machine, wherein a fourth effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means can be executed before the third effect is executed.
[Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
In the third performance, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of balls that can be acquired this time.

  The payout display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This payout display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect during the probability changing state or the short-time state (for example, at the end of the reach effect (before the start of the jackpot game)) or during the jackpot game.

[Discharge display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect A. FIG.
In the payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout plan display effect is executed after the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot) is notified and before the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game. A projected number-of-balls suggestion image D2A is displayed. The payout planned number-of-balls suggestion image D2A is an image that suggests the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the number of balls planned to be paid out). In the payout planned ball number suggestion image D2A in FIG. 87 (A), it is shown that 800 balls are scheduled to be paid out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. Cumulative payout planned ball number suggestion image D2B is a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as consecutive big hits) that was won prior to the jackpot among consecutive jackpots (hereinafter also referred to as consecutive hits). This is an image that suggests the number of balls that are paid out during the jackpot game based on the number of balls that are scheduled to be paid out (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of balls to be paid out). In other words, the cumulative payout planned ball number suggestion image D2B suggests the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game based on the consecutive big hits.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), a cumulative payout addition display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout addition display effect, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C are displayed. Cumulative payout ball suggestion image D2C is a ball obtained by adding the number of payout balls, which is the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game, to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the past jackpot It is an image that suggests the number (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of payout balls). In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C suggests the number of balls that have already been paid out in the jackpot game based on consecutive big hits. In FIG. 87 (C), the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is arranged below the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C, and between the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C. Indicates a slash (line). That is, the cumulative payout planned ball number suggestion image D2B is arranged at the denominator position, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C is arranged at the numerator position, and is expressed in the form of “cumulative payout ball number / cumulative payout planned ball number”. .

  This payout display effect A is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the time-varying probability change state, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the time-changed non-changeable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout display effect A may be executed even at the time of a big hit that does not shift to the uncertain change state with time reduction.

[Discharge display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect B.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88A, a payout schedule display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout plan display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B, the jackpot payout ball number related image D2E, and the consecutive number of times suggestion An image D2D is displayed. The payout ball number related image D2E suggests the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the payout ball number) and the payout planned ball number. In FIG. 88 (B), the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged on the right side of the display of the number of balls to be paid out, and the slash ( Line). That is, the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the denominator position, and the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the position of the denominator. The continuous-chang-number suggesting image D2D is an image that suggests the number of consecutive large-big hits, that is, the number of consecutive big hits.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the cumulative payout addition display effect is executed. This cumulative payout addition display effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the payout ball number related image D2E, the consecutive chute number suggestion image D2D, and the cumulative payout ball number related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number related image D2F suggests the cumulative payout ball number and the cumulative payout ball number. In FIG. 88 (C), the cumulative payout planned ball number display is arranged on the right side of the cumulative payout ball number display, and a slash ( Line). That is, the display of the cumulative payout planned number of balls is arranged at the denominator position, and the display of the cumulative payout ball number is arranged at the denominator position, which is expressed in the form of “cumulative payout number of balls / cumulative payout planned number of balls”.

  In the payout display effects A and B, as described above, the payout schedule display effect is executed during the final stage of the change effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect. Can be executed during the final stage of the change effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout addition display effect can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect and the cumulative payout addition display effect are executed during the jackpot game.

  This payout display effect B is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the time-varying probability change state, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the time-changed non-changeable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout display effect B may be executed even at the time of a big hit that does not shift to the time-stamped uncertain change state.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of the payout display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout planned display number suggestion image D2A is displayed as the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect is displayed. The cumulative payout planned ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player can grasp the cumulative payout planned number of balls in the consecutive hit game in addition to the planned payout number of balls in the jackpot game, the player's willingness to play can be improved. . As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout additional display effect is displayed when the cumulative payout planned number of balls is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play until the cumulative payout planned number of balls is reached. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the payout display effect B, when the cumulative payout planned number of balls is displayed in the cumulative payout schedule display effect or the cumulative payout addition display effect, The number of payout balls is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of payout balls, and can improve the player's willingness to play until reaching the cumulative payout planned number of balls. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the payout display effect C, when the cumulative payout planned number of balls is displayed, the number of consecutive chants is suggested. According to this configuration, since the average number of payout balls (average number of payout balls) in one jackpot game can be associated from the relationship between the cumulative number of expected payout balls and the number of consecutive chants, if the average number of payout balls is large The player can feel happiness, and when the average number of payout balls is small, the player's willingness to play can be improved in order to extend the chain. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the payout display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, The cumulative payout addition display effect may not be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the display indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, when the game state after the jackpot is not the probability variation game state, the display indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the payout display effects A and B are executed in the order of a payout schedule display effect, a cumulative payout schedule display effect, and a cumulative payout addition display effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the order of these may be changed. For example, it may be in the order of a payout schedule display effect, a cumulative payout addition display effect, a cumulative payout schedule display effect, or a cumulative payout schedule display effect, a payout schedule display effect, and a cumulative payout addition display effect.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout planned number of balls is determined based on the jackpot in the continuous chain. Is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls that were paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot won before the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots from the morning of the day It may be the number of balls (the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out on the day) to which the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is added. In this case, the cumulative number of payout balls on that day may also be displayed.
Also, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning before the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots from a certain timing (accumulated number of balls to be paid at a predetermined timing) The number of balls to which the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is added (the number of balls scheduled to be paid out at a predetermined timing). In this case, the predetermined number of accumulated payout balls may also be displayed. Note that the gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine “a certain timing”. As a result, the player can arbitrarily set “certain timing”.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D2-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
A determination means for determining whether or not a big hit is made by lottery;
A jackpot game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game for paying out a game medium to a player in the case of a jackpot;
A gaming machine comprising
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a payout schedule display indicating a payout schedule number that is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out in the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot,
The first jackpot is a jackpot when the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The second display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot game is added to the number of game media in the first jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout schedule display that shows the cumulative payout number including the planned payout number,
The second jackpot is a jackpot won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot in the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D2-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game is already paid out during the first jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout number indicating the cumulative payout number including the number of media,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect D2-3]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect that is performed during the first jackpot game and performs the jackpot payout display indicating the number of game media that have already been paid out during the first jackpot game,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2, characterized in that.
[Aspect D2-4]
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect that is performed during the first jackpot game and performs a continuous jackpot number display indicating the number of consecutive jackpots,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect D2-5]
When the first jackpot is a jackpot where the gaming state after the first jackpot game is a third gaming state that is disadvantageous to the second gaming state, the combination effect is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4, characterized in that.

  The winning image / character image superimposing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This winning image / character image superimposing effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects that the image control microcomputer 101 receives and executes a round designation command from the sub-control board 90.

[Winning image / character image superimposing effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning image / character image superimposing effect A. FIG. In the winning image / character image superimposing effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 89 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71 that becomes “long opening” in the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). This is executed when at least a part of the subsequent game balls passes through the V region 39. Here, a V winning image WP that suggests that the game ball has passed the V region 39 is displayed. The V winning image WP is an image that suggests that it will be in a highly accurate time-short state later, so it can be said that the V-winning image WP is an image that suggests a gaming state that is advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 89 (A), the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP. As described above, in this specification, “images overlap” means that they appear to be overlapped as viewed from the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, if at least a portion of the V winning image WP displayed on the display screen 7a appears missing from the first character image AN1, it can be said that the images overlap.

  The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, an image in a state where the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, an image indicating a state in which the first character image AN1 is positioned is displayed in front of a part of the V winning image WP. Even if the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 89 (B), a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a, and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

  As both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 move leftward, the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89C is executed. Specifically, an image in a state where both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 overlap with a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 89C, a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

  As the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 move further leftward, the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89D is executed. Specifically, an image in a state where only the second character image AN2 is superimposed on a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, the V winning image WP in a state where the first character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed. The first character image AN1 is out of the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, the second character image AN2 further moves leftward, so that the winning image and the character image become non-superimposed as shown in FIG. 89 (E). Specifically, the V winning image WP in a state where the character images (first character image AN1 and second character image AN2) do not overlap is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the second character image AN2 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Winning image / character image superimposing effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning image / character image superimposing effect B. FIG.
The winning image / character image superimposing effect B is different from the superimposing effect A of FIG. 89 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The shape of the V winning image WP of the superimposed effect B changes so as to represent a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman letter “V” is horizontally rotated. First, in FIG. 90A, the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90A, and the first character image AN1 is overlapped with a part of the V winning image WP. Is displayed. The V winning image WP has a shape showing a state in which a figure representing a three-dimensional shape is oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to FIG. Even in a state where the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 90B, a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a, and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90B, and the first character image AN1 and the second character are partly included in the V winning image WP. An image in which both of the images AN2 overlap is displayed. In FIG. 90C, a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90D, only the second character image AN2 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP while the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90C. An image of the status is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 90E, the V winning image WP in a state where the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90D and the character images are not overlapped is displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 90F, the V winning image WP in a state where the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with FIG. 90E and the character images are not overlapped is displayed.

[Winning image / character image superimposing effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining a winning image / character image superimposing effect C.
The winning image / character image superimposing effect C is different from the superimposing effect B of FIG. 90 in the display method of the character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C does not move to the left and right on the display screen 7a and intersects the V winning image WP, but changes its shape in accordance with the change in the shape of the V winning image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C is arranged on one surface of the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP, and when the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP is horizontally rotated, both are horizontally rotated. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 91A, an image in a state where the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V winning image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state where the character image AN1 is located on a part of the front surface of the V winning image WP is displayed. Even in a state where the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change compared to FIG. 91 (A). Specifically, an image showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented in the horizontal direction as compared with FIG. 91A is displayed. Even in this state, the character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), an image showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented further in the horizontal direction than in FIG. 91 (B) is displayed. Here, the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is facing sideways, and the V winning image WP in a state where the character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further rotated horizontally than in FIG. 91 (C), and among the three-dimensional shapes of the V winning image WP, An image is displayed in which the other surface side where the character image AN1 is not arranged is visible. The character image AN1 is invisible by the V winning image WP, and the V winning image WP in a state where the character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further rotated horizontally than in FIG. 91 (D), and among the three-dimensional shapes of the V winning image WP, An image in which the other surface on which the character image AN1 is not placed is the front is displayed. The character image AN1 is partially visible from between the V winning images WP, but the V winning image WP in a state where the character images AN1 do not overlap is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the three-dimensional shape combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further rotated laterally than in FIG. 91 (E). The V winning award image WP is displayed in a state where it cannot be seen and the character image AN1 does not overlap.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of the winning image / character image superimposing effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to (D), FIGS. 90 (B) to (D), and FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B), at least a part of the V winning image WP. An image in which the character images overlap is displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 89 (A), (E), (F), FIGS. 90 (A), (E), (F), and FIGS. 91 (C)-(F), the V prize in a state where the character images do not overlap. An image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, so that the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to (D), FIGS. 90 (B) to (D), and FIGS. 91 (A) and (B), a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. Even when the image in which the character images overlap is displayed, another part of the V winning image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, even if the character image overlaps a part of the V winning image WP, the player can be shown a part of the V winning image WP. Can be convinced and can improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90 (A), (B), (D) to (F), and FIGS. 91 (A), (B), (D) to (F), An image in a state where the right-handed image is overlapped with a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, the V-winning image WP appears to be located in the back of the right-handed image, so that it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the V winning image WP changes in shape so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure of Roman “V” is rotating. According to this configuration, the V-winning image WP appears to be located in the back of the right-handed image, so that it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, an effect is performed in a state where the character image overlaps or does not overlap the V winning image WP. According to this configuration, the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, so that the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the winning image / character image superimposing effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, a part of the V winning image WP is visible even when the V winning image WP is covered with the character image. However, the V winning image WP may be entirely covered with the character image, and the V winning image WP may not be visible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image / character image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 may be displayed in appropriate combination. In addition, the winning image / character image superimposing effects A to C may not include a part of the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or other effects may be added. In addition, the winning image / character image superimposing effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. .

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image that suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first display in which an image in which the second image overlaps at least a part of the first image is displayed, and the first image in a state in which the second image does not overlap is displayed. And a second display capable of executing the second display.
[Aspect D3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the first display, a part of the first image is displayed so that the second image is not overlapped.
[Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image that suggests right-handedness,
In the first display, an image in a state where the third image overlaps a part of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image changes in shape so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
[Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is a V winning image.

  The meter effect in the button image will be described with reference to FIGS. This meter effect in the button image is executed during a decorative design variation effect (during a single variation effect) (for example, when a decorative design change starts, a reach effect (super reach effect)), or during a jackpot game Can be done.

[Meter production A in button image]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A in the button image.
In the meter effect A in the button image, first, as shown in FIG. 92A, a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E1A and a meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed. The meter image E1B is a meter in which the meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter region. Further, the meter image E1B is disposed sideways in the button image E1A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point giving effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. In the point acquisition image E1C of FIG. 92 (B), it is shown that 3 points (3P) are given to the player (the player has acquired 3 points). In addition, in the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, it is indicated that the meter area for the point is expanded and the meter value is increased by giving the point. The meter value of the meter image E1B increases every time the point provision effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This point granting effect is a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggestion effect), a jackpot notice effect, a reach development destination notice effect, a hold change notice, a look ahead effect, a hold expectation suggestion effect, or a pseudo It can be started in response to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92C, a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a chance up image E1D are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is maximized (MAX is shown. The chance-up image E1D is an image that suggests a chance-up. The chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up image E1D in FIG. And a letter “expectation 50%” indicating that the expectation degree of jackpot is about 50% .The chance-up image E1D is a button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed next to each other.

[Meter production B in button image]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B in the button image.
In the button image meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93A, a button meter display effect is executed as in FIG. 92A.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), a point giving effect is executed as in FIG. 92 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a timer image E1E are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is maximized (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, the timer value is displayed by the countdown method, and 50 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E1F and a timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E1F is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E1A was present, is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image E1A is darkened, and / or It is an image showing a state as if the button image E1A is lit. In addition, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E1F, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The timer image E1E indicates that the timer value is “0 seconds”. The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes “0 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed after a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value becomes “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the effective operation period has passed. The meter image E1B may be displayed in the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may indicate the maximum (MAX), or may return to the initial value (no meter area).

  After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 within the effective operation period due to the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation suggestion production), jackpot notice production, reach development ahead notice production, pending change notice, or pre-reading start notice are executed. obtain.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of meter production in a button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter image E1B is displayed when the button image E1A is displayed. This meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (chance-up effect or the like) is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in association with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation with respect to the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in connection with the meter display. When it is performed, a surprise feeling can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. In the point granting effect, the point acquisition image E1C is displayed, and when a predetermined point is given, the meter area for the point given in the meter image E1B is enlarged, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. The According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases due to the point addition, the increase in the meter value due to the point acquisition can be emphasized. In addition, when the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image rises due to the point addition, reaches a predetermined value (maximum value), and develops into a button effect using the effect button 63, the player wins a big hit Can give a great expectation to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed next to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for developing a button effect using the effect button 63, and further a sense of expectation for a jackpot when the button effect is developed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the meter effect B in the button image, the timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value becomes maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches a predetermined value, the player is expected to develop the button effect using the effect button 63, and further, the jackpot when the player develops the button effect. Can give you a sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes “0 seconds” by the button press effect, the effect is given to the player. A button image E1F that prompts the user to press the button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a player a stronger sense of expectation for button production development using the production button 63, and further a strong expectation for jackpot when it develops to a button production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum (MAX) in the chance up effect and the timer display effect. When executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are compared with the case where the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). The expectation of jackpot when it develops to can be enlarged. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of meter production in a button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacently, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be arranged in the button image E1A or a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed at a distant position.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B may be a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter region may be decreased and the meter value may be decreased due to the provision of points by the point providing effect. Good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92C or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 93C may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving points by the point giving effect, the meter area may be enlarged and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92 (C) and a timer display effect shown in FIG. 93 (C) are executed. Note that “predetermined operation has been executed” means that, for example, a pseudo-continuous display has been executed, a hold icon has been changed (hold change display has been made), or a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed And the success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value, not when the meter value is the maximum value (MAX). The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a 1/4 value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be attached to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the predetermined value is known to the player.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the meter effect A in the button image, after the chance up image E1D is displayed in the chance up effect, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). You may make it return to. Thereafter, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the meter image B in the button image has a configuration in which the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button press effect. The meter image E1B may be displayed without being limited thereto. In this case, the meter image E1B may be arranged in the button image E1F. Thereafter, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image meter effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the button image meter The effects A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the meter effect B in the button image, the timer image E1E is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button press effect can be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, one timer image is displayed in the meter effect B in the button image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more are displayed. These timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation part image representing the operation part,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first mode of the plurality of modes.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed. In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed. The second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the meter is displayed in the first operation unit image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect, A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined point is given,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. In the display effect of 2, the meter is displayed from the second mode to the third mode different from the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2, characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-4]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-5]
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
The fifth display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, and a second operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit Is the effect that is displayed,
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the value of the meter becomes a maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, characterized in that.

  The button image display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This in-button image display effect is executed during a decorative design variation effect (during a single variation effect) (for example, when a decorative design change starts, a reach effect (super reach effect)), or during a jackpot game Can be done.

[Button image display effect A]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A in the button image.
In the button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E2A and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E <b> 2 </ b> A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The meter image E2B is a meter in which the meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter region. Further, the meter image E2B is disposed side by side adjacent to the button image E2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point provision effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image that suggests that a predetermined point has been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired the predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E2C of FIG. 94 (B), it is shown that 4 points (4P) are given to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). In addition, in the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is indicated that the meter area for the point is expanded and the meter value is increased by giving the point. The meter value of the meter image E2B increases every time the point provision effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This point granting effect is a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggestion effect), a jackpot notice effect, a reach development destination notice effect, a hold change notice, a look ahead effect, a hold expectation suggestion effect, or a pseudo It can be started in response to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94C, a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a chance up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged, and the meter value is maximized (maximum is shown to be MAX. Further, the chance-up image E2D indicates a chance-up. The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up image E2D in FIG. The chance up image E2D is displayed in the button image E2A.

[In-button display effect B]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B in the button image.
In the in-button image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 95A, a button meter display effect is executed as in FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), a point giving effect is executed as in FIG. 94 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), a meter MAX notification effect is executed. In this meter MAX notification effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is maximized (MAX). The meter value suggestion image E2E is an image that is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) and suggests that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E2F, a meter value suggestion image E2E, and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is displayed in the same size as the button image E2A and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. It is an image showing this. Specifically, the button image E2F is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image E2A is darkened and / or an image representing a state as if the button image E2A is lit. It is. In addition, in order to urge the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E2F, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the effective operation period has passed. The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2F. Note that the meter value suggestion image E2E may be displayed not in the button image E2F but adjacent to the button image E2F, or may be displayed in the meter image E2B. In addition, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 95D represents the maximum (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter value of the meter image E2B may return to the initial value (no meter area).

  After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 by the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. Predetermined effects include a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggestion effect), a jackpot notice effect, a reach advance notice effect, a hold change notice, a timer display effect, or a pre-read start notice. An effect can be executed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of the display effect in a button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, when the button image E2A is displayed, the meter image E2B is displayed and the meter image E2B is displayed. When the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) after the display, the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, the player who has seen the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be associated with the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed, the player can be given a great sense of expectation for the jackpot regarding the button effect. Moreover, since the predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, a surprise feeling can be created in the predetermined effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is displayed, and the point giving effect is performed. When the point acquisition image E2C is displayed and a predetermined point is given, the meter area for the point given in the meter image E2B is enlarged, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. According to this structure, since the meter value of a meter image rises by point provision, the player can recognize the raise of the meter value by point acquisition. Therefore, since the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be displayed by the change in the meter value, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, the meter value notification suggests that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum (MAX) in the meter MAX notification effect. The image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is reminded that the button effect using the effect button 63 is executed before the button press effect. Can do. Therefore, when a button effect (including a button press effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for jackpot regarding the button effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) in the button image display effect B, the player presses the effect button 63. The prompt button image E2F is displayed, and the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the meter value suggestion image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for jackpot in a predetermined effect developed by pressing the effect button 63. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the display of the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E in the display effects A and B within the button image is the meter value of the meter image E2B. It is executed at the maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed in a higher chance than when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). When the image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the display effect in a button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, the meter image E2B is arranged adjacent to the button image E2A. Is not limited to this. For example, the meter image E2B may be displayed in the button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation with respect to the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in connection with the meter display. When it is performed, a surprise feeling can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. The meter image E2B may be arranged in a predetermined direction and a predetermined distance away from the button image E2A.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) in the display effects A and B within the button image, the button image E2A is displayed. The chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the region (in the button image E2A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a reach notice, and a jackpot expectation degree are displayed in the area (in the button image E2A) where the button image E2A is displayed. Various images such as an image suggesting an image or a timer image may be displayed, or various effects such as an effect of moving a predetermined character may be executed in an area where the button image E2A is displayed (in the button image E2A). Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, in the button press effect, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (in the button image E2F). Although displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. In the button press effect, for example, in the area (in the button image E2F) where the button image E2F is displayed, the chance-up image E2D, the image suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect, the image suggesting the reach notice, and the jackpot expectation Various images such as an suggested image may be displayed, and various effects such as an effect of moving a predetermined character may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (in the button image E2A).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter region is decreased and the meter value is decreased by the provision of points by the point providing effect. Good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94C or a meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95C may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving points by the point giving effect, the meter area may be enlarged and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94 (C) and a meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) are executed. Note that “predetermined operation has been executed” means that, for example, a pseudo-continuous display has been executed, a hold icon has been changed (hold change display has been made), or a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. And the success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the display effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX) for the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect may be executed when the meter value of the meter image E2B becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value instead of the maximum value (MAX). The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a 1/4 value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be put on the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, in the button image display effect A, after the chance up image E2D is displayed in the chance up effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0). You may make it return to. Thereafter, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, after the meter image E2B is displayed by the button press effect, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0). ). Thereafter, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effects A and B in the button image are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the display in the button image The effects A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation part image representing the operation part,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first mode of the plurality of modes.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed. In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode, the predetermined display is performed in a region where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E2-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined point is given,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. The display of the display effect of 2 is changed from the second aspect different from the first aspect to the third aspect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E2-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display indicating that the meter is in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the first display effect. 1 displayed in the operation unit image,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E2-5]
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect that displays an operation unit image representing the operation unit and a second operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter is in the first aspect of the plurality of aspects in the third display effect, and then the second operation unit. The predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the value of the meter becomes a maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5, characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the multi-variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This multi-variation effect can be executed during a decorative effect variation effect (including reach effect (super reach effect)) over a plurality of variations.

[Multi-variation production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect A. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variation meter display effect, a hold icon E3 and a meter image E3C are displayed. The hold icon E3 includes a first hold icon E3B (up to eight) indicating hold and a second hold icon E3A indicating the hold. For the sake of simplicity, in the first hold icon E3B, only the first hold icons (up to four) corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 1 are shown in the figure. That is, in the figure, the first hold icon E3B corresponds to the hold image 9A. The same applies to the multi-variation effects.

  The meter image E3C is a meter in which the meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter region. The meter image E3C is arranged vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the variation point giving effect is executed. This variation point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-described variation meter display effect, and a hold icon E3, a meter image E3C, and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. The point acquisition image E3D is an image that suggests that a predetermined point has been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired the predetermined point. The point acquisition image E3D in FIG. 96 (B) shows that 2 points (2P) are awarded to the player (the player has acquired 2 points). In addition, the meter image E3C indicates that when a point is given, the meter area corresponding to the point is enlarged as compared with the time of the change meter display effect, and the meter value increases. The meter value of the meter image E3C increases every time point grant is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the accumulated value of the acquired points. This variation point giving effect is a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggestion effect), a jackpot notice effect, a reach development destination notice effect, a hold change notice, a look ahead effect, a hold expectation suggestion effect, or It can be started in response to the execution of various effects such as pseudo-continuous effects. Similarly, the next change point giving effect described later can be executed in response to the execution of these various effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next change point giving effect is an effect executed during the next change effect of the change (the change) in which the change point display effect and the change point giving effect are executed. The hold icon E3, the meter An image E3C and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. The point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 96C shows that 5 points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). In addition, the meter image E3C indicates that, by giving points, the meter area corresponding to the points is expanded as compared with the change point giving effect, and the meter value is increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96D, a button press effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-described next variation point giving effect, and a button image E3E, a hold icon E3, and a meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E3E is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is represented as “PUSH” in the image and represents an image as if it is lit. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E3E, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. Also, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 96 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, a hold icon E3 and a chance up image E3F are displayed. The chance-up image E3F is an image that suggests a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F shown in FIG. 96 (E), the characters “Gekiatsu!” Suggesting that the expectation of jackpot is high. The chance-up image E3F is represented as an utterance by the teammate character CRA.

[Multi-variation production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect B.
In the multiple variation effect B, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (E), the variation meter display effect, the variation point giving effect, the next variation point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect are performed. Executed. Each of these effects is basically the change meter display effect, the change point giving effect, the next change point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance-up effect shown in FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E). Each of the multiple variation effects B is different in that the button image E3G is displayed in the variation meter display effect, the variation point provision effect, and the next variation point provision effect. The button image E3G is an image that is arranged in the approximate center of the display screen 7a and suggests the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed.

[Multi-variation production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect C. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 98 (A), in the multiple variation effect C, the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variation meter display effect, a hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96A, a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97A, and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter area. The area in which the button image E3G is displayed (in the button image E3G) Placed in.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the variation point giving effect is executed. This variation point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-described variation meter display effect, and the hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (B) and the same point as FIG. 96 (B). An acquired image E3D, a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97B, and a meter image E3H are displayed. This variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that, by giving points, the meter area corresponding to the points is expanded as compared with the change meter display effect, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E3H increases every time point grant is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next change point giving effect is an effect executed during the next change effect of the change (the change) in which the change point display effect and the change point giving effect are executed, as shown in FIG. A similar hold icon E3, a point acquisition image E3D similar to FIG. 96C, a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97C, and a meter image E3H are displayed. This next variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that, by giving points, the meter area for the points is expanded more than that at the time of the changing point giving effect, and the meter value is increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a button press effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-described next variation point giving effect, and a button image E3E similar to FIG. 96 (D) and a hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (D). And a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in an area where the button image E3E is displayed (in the button image E3E). The meter value of the meter image E3H in FIG. 98 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a hold icon E3, a button image E3G, a meter image E3H, and a timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. The timer image E3I shown in FIG. 98 (E) shows “100 seconds” as the timer initial value. This timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. When the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes “0 seconds”, a predetermined effect, for example, a chance up effect as shown in FIG. 97 (E) may be executed.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of multiple variation effects is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the point giving effect is executed across a plurality of continuous variation effects, that is, the plurality of variation effects. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the accumulated values (accumulated points) of the acquired points are displayed over a predetermined point. When the meter value (cumulative point) of the meter image reaches the maximum (MAX), a button pressing effect is displayed in which a button image E3E that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. A chance-up effect, a timer display effect, etc. are executed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, even if the accumulated point does not become the maximum (MAX) in one variation effect, the point is handed over to the next variation effect, so the player straddles a plurality of variation effects, You can enjoy the production of points. In addition, since the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points acquired over the plurality of variable effects become the maximum (MAX), the button pressing effect can be made to stand out. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 to 98, in the multiple variation effects B and C, the point giving effect is executed across a plurality of continuous variation effects, that is, the multiple variation effects. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the accumulated values (accumulated points) of the acquired points are displayed over a predetermined point. When the meter images E3C and E3H are displayed, the button image E3G is displayed. According to this configuration, since the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 can be predicted by accumulating points, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the meter image E3H representing the accumulated value (accumulated points) of the acquired points is an area (button image) where the button image E3G is displayed. E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation with respect to the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in connection with the meter display. When it is performed, a surprise feeling can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the multiple variation effects A and B, after the button press effect, a chance-up effect that is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree is executed. According to this configuration, since a chance-up effect that suggests a jackpot expectation level is executed based on points accumulated over a plurality of fluctuating effects, the chance-up effect suggests that the jackpot expectation level is high. Can raise the sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect. According to this configuration, since the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated over a plurality of variable effects, an effect with a high jackpot expectation degree when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes 0 seconds. Can raise the expectation that will be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is the maximum (MAX) meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H. When executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is compared with the case where the meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H is executed when the meter value is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). The expectation to the jackpot when the timer display effect is developed can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a multi-variation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, as the part of the prefetching effect (continuous effect spanning multiple variations), the point giving effect or the next variable point giving. It is good also as a structure (the structure which acquires a point over several fluctuation effects as a part of prefetching effect) in which the point provision in an effect is performed. According to this configuration, every time a point is acquired, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the accumulated points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the accumulated points may be suggested by expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX) by numbers.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, a button image is displayed when a chance up effect or a timer display effect is performed, and the chance up effect or the timer is displayed. A display effect may be executed within the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the change meter display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are predetermined values (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases due to the points given by the point giving effect It is good also as a structure. In this case, when the meter value becomes a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving points by the point giving effect, the meter area may be enlarged and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) and a timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) are executed. Note that “predetermined operation has been executed” means that, for example, a pseudo-continuous display has been executed, a hold icon has been changed (hold change display has been made), or a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. And the success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are the maximum value (MAX) for the chance up effect and the timer display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are not the maximum value (MAX) but become a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a 1/4 value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be attached to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the predetermined value is known to the player.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer image E3I is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button press effect can be executed. A plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the multiple variation effects A to C are executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the multiple variation effects A to C. C may be executed in one variation effect.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect in the multiple variation effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button press is performed. Other effects may be executed after the effects. Other productions include pseudo-continuous production, reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation suggestion production), jackpot notice production, reach development ahead notice production, hold change notice, or pre-reading start notice The structure which can produce an effect may be sufficient.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E3-1]
A symbol display means capable of performing symbol variation display to be stopped after starting symbol variation display;
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of obtaining a predetermined point across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays, and performing a point suggesting display that suggests the accumulated points acquired,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an operation unit image representing the operation unit and displaying a first operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the accumulated point in the first display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed, and the player operates the operation unit. In response, a predetermined production is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E3-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation part image representing the operation part,
The combination effect is an effect that may include a third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the first display effect may be performed in a region where the second operation unit image in the third display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-6]
A pre-reading effect execution means capable of executing a pre-reading effect is provided.
In the first display effect, a predetermined point is obtained over a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays as the prefetch effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5, characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-7]
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the cumulative point is a maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6, which is characterized in that.

  The operation charge effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation charge effect is performed in parallel with the decorative symbol variation effect. Of course, including the execution of reach production (super reach production).

[Operation charge effect A (success)]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect is stopped.

In the sword image KG, the pattern portion is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, the region is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99D, a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order, such as the region R2->R3->R4-> R5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a charge effect (final stage) is executed. In the charge effect (final stage), the drawing color of the region R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the region R5 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction effect, an image instructing to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “Press!” Is displayed together with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation charge effect A (failure)]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect is stopped.

In the sword image KG, the pattern portion is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, the region is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100D, a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of the region R2 is changed from blue to red.
100A to 100D are the same effects as the operation charge effect (success) shown in FIG. 99. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), a charge effect (medium period) is executed. In the charge effect (middle period), the drawing color of the region R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the region R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the variation continuation effect is executed. In the variation continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the same effect as the variation start effect shown in FIG. That is, the charge effect is interrupted when the region R3 changes from blue to red, and the same effect as the change start effect is performed.

[Operation charge effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect B.
First, in the operation charge effect B, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition, on-screen images 9A and 9B and a reserved digest image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed in the same manner in the following effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), a charge notice effect is executed. In the charge notice effect, the charge notice image is displayed in a state where the button image BB1 indicating the effect button 63 is displayed. Here, a state in which an elliptical charge notice image JG1 marked “C” is displayed is shown. The button image BB1 has five areas S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), a charge effect is executed. In the charge effect, the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge notice image appears in the charge notice effect described above. Here, a state in which the region S1 has changed from blue to red is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a charge notice effect is executed. The charge notice effect is the effect described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), and here shows a state in which an elliptical charge notice image JG2 labeled “C × 4” is displayed. In addition to the charge image “C”, “C × 2”, “C × 3”, “C × 4”, and “C × 5” are prepared for the charge notice image. The number of regions that can be changed from blue to red is determined by the numerical value written after “x”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), a charge effect is executed. The charge effect is the effect described with reference to FIG. 101C, and the drawing color of the region of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge notice image appears. Here, the four areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red in correspondence with the charge notice image JG2 of “C × 4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction effect, an image instructing to press the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG “Press!” Is displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas, and the drawing color of these areas is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. When the drawing color of all the regions is changed to red, a button press instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change in the drawing color leads to the player's expectation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B) and 101 (D), a charge notice image is displayed as a charge notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 101 (C) and 101 (E), the charge effect is executed with the display of the charge notice image. That is, the plurality of regions S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation by displaying the charge notice image, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charge notice image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (B), as shown in FIG. 101 (C), in the charge effect, one region S1 is drawn. The color is changed from blue to red. On the other hand, when the charge notice image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the drawing color of the two or more areas S2 to S5 is changed from blue to red as shown in FIG. 101 (E). It is done. According to this configuration, the player's expectation can be varied depending on the type of the charge notice image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent regions R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charge effect is easy to understand, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all the drawing colors in the areas R1 to R6 are red as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99 (F). Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), if the drawing colors of the regions R1 to R3 are red, but the regions R4 to R6 are blue, the button press instruction effect is not executed. According to this structure, expectation increases whether a charge production is successful, and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the drawing color of all the regions R1 to R6 of the sword image KG is red, a button press instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the drawing color of all the regions B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 becomes red, a button press instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button press instruction effect may be executed when the drawing color of a part of the region turns red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pattern portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions S1 to S6 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of regions.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the region is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a wire frame display, for example, where the color of the region is the same as the background color is performed, and the drawing color of the region of the wire frame image is changed (colored). Good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E4-1]
An operation means operable by the player
A display device capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
The image of the operation means has a plurality of areas,
By changing the drawing color of the plurality of regions from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the operable state of the operation means. A gaming machine.
[Aspect E4-2]
A specific image can be displayed at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
The gaming machine, wherein the drawing color of the plurality of areas is changed from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order with the display of the specific image.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image among the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of regions is changed, and when the second specific image is displayed among the specific images, the plurality of the specific images are displayed. A gaming machine characterized by changing the drawing color of two or more of the areas.
[Aspect E4-4]
An image of the operation means is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When the drawing colors of the plurality of areas all become the second drawing color, the operation unit becomes operable. When the drawing colors of the plurality of areas include a region that is not the second drawing color, the operation unit A gaming machine that is not operable.

  The pseudo-continuous point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This pseudo-continuous point effect can be executed during a decorative effect change effect (during one change effect) (for example, at the start of a change of a decorative symbol or during a reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Pseudo-point production A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous point effect A.
In the pseudo-continuous point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo continuous effect, a pseudo continuous suggestion image E5A and a meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestion image E5A is an image reminiscent of the pseudo-continuous production, and specifically, “pseudo × 2” is suggested to suggest that the pseudo-continuous production is the second time. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of “7, logo design, 7” in the decorative design. The meter image E5B is a meter in which the meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the drawing) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter region. Further, the meter image E5B is arranged vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

  Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of fluctuation change or during reach effect, for example, an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, or a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol An effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops at least a part, an effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-relation such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”, Includes an effect to execute a decorative design variation effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a meter image E5B and a point acquisition image E5C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variation effect or according to another effect. That is, the point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. The point acquisition image E5C is an image that suggests that a predetermined point has been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired the predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E5C in FIG. 102 (B), it is shown that 5 points (5P) are given to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). In addition, the meter image E5B indicates that, by giving points, the meter area corresponding to the points is expanded more than that at the time of the change meter display effect, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E5B increases every time point grant is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), a button press effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5B are displayed. The button image E5D is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image E5D is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image represented as “PUSH” in the image and representing a state as if it is lit. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image E5D, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. A meter image E5B in FIG. 102C indicates that the meter value is the maximum (MAX).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102D, a chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this chance up effect, a chance up image E5E is displayed. The chance-up image E5E is an image that suggests a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E in FIG. 102 (D), the characters “It ’s super hot!” Suggesting that the expectation of the big hit is high. The chance-up image E5E is represented as an utterance by the teammate character CRA.

[Pseudo-ream point production B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous point effect B. FIG.
In the pseudo-continuous point effect B, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this pseudo continuous effect, a pseudo continuous suggestion image E5A, a button image E5G, and a meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102 (A) are displayed. The button image E5G is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed. The meter image E5F is a meter in which the meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and represents the meter value by moving the meter region. Further, the meter image E5F is arranged horizontally in the region (in the button image E5G) where the button image E5G is displayed. Similarly to FIG. 102A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at a logo symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of “7, logo design, 7” in the decorative design. The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a button image E5G, a meter image E5F, and a point acquisition image E5C similar to FIG. 102 (B) are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed again when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variation effect or according to another effect. That is, the point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times. Further, in the meter image E5F arranged in the button image E5G, it is shown that the meter area corresponding to the point is expanded more than that at the time of the change meter display effect and the meter value is increased by giving the point. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F increases every time point grant is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the accumulated value of the acquired points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), a button press effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102 (C) are displayed. The meter image E5F is arranged in an area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, in the button image E5D. Also, the meter image E5F in FIG. 103C represents that the meter value is the maximum (MAX). The button image E5D has the same shape as the button image E5G.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this timer display effect, a button image E3G, a meter image E5F, and a timer image E5H similar to those in FIG. 103 (A) are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image E5H shown in FIG. 103 (D), “100 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value. The timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. When the timer value of the timer image E5H reaches “0 seconds”, a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102D or a pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of a pseudo | simulation continuous point effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 to FIG. 103, the pseudo-continuous effects are executed in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, and the accumulated value (cumulative points) of the points given in the point granting effects. Is expressed using the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F, and the button image E5D is displayed in response to the meter value becoming maximum (MAX), and the chance is increased when the player presses the effect button 63 An effect and a timer display effect are executed. According to this configuration, points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo-continuous effect, and when the accumulated point reaches the maximum (MAX), effects such as a chance-up effect and a timer display effect can be executed. It can be more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect B, the meter image E5F is displayed during the pseudo-continuous effect or the point giving effect. According to this configuration, since the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 can be predicted during the pseudo-ream effect or the point giving effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement and improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect AB, the meter image E5F that suggests accumulated points is arranged in the area (in the button image E5G) where the button image E5G is displayed. The According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation with respect to the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in connection with the meter display. When it is performed, a surprise feeling can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pseudo-ream point effect A, after the button press effect, a chance-up effect that is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree is executed. According to this configuration, since the chance-up effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-rendition effect, the expectation that the chance of the jackpot expectation is high. Can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect B, a timer display effect is executed after the button press effect. According to this configuration, since the timer display effect is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous effect, when the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes 0 seconds, the effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed. Can increase the sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G is the maximum (MAX) Executed when. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is compared with the case where the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G is executed when the meter value is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). The expectation to the jackpot when the timer display effect is developed can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a pseudo | simulation continuous point effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous effects A and B, when the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5F becomes the maximum (MAX), the button press effect is generated. The chance up effect and the timer display effect are executed in response to the effect button 63 being pressed by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the chance up effect and the timer display effect may be executed without pressing the effect button 63 by the player. Further, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the button press effect is not executed (the button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed. Also good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F. It is not limited. For example, the accumulated points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the accumulated points may be suggested by expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX) by numbers.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is performed, and the chance-up effect or A timer display effect may be executed within the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are increased by giving points. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F have a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value) at the time of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the meter region decreases and the meter value decreases due to the point giving by the point giving effect. Also good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102C or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 103C may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are increased by giving points. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving points by the point giving effect, the meter area may be enlarged and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (C) and a timer display effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) are executed. Note that “predetermined operation has been executed” means that, for example, a pseudo-continuous display has been executed, a hold icon has been changed (hold change display has been made), or a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. And the success of a predetermined challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5F is the maximum value (MAX) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be executed when the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5F is not the maximum value (MAX) but a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value of the meter value or a 1/4 value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be attached to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the predetermined value is known to the player.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect B, the timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described button press effect can be executed. A plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed again after the button press effect. Further, after the button press effect, another effect may be executed after the button press effect. As other effects, various effects such as a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggestion effect), a jackpot notice effect, a reach development destination notice effect, a pending change notice, or a pre-read start notice are executed. The structure to obtain may be sufficient.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E5-1]
Effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
An operation unit that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The second display effect is an effect in which a point is given and a point suggesting display that suggests the accumulated points of the given points is performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an operation unit image representing the operation unit and displaying a first operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the certain point is given in response to the first display effect being performed, and the point suggestion display is performed. Then, the third display effect is performed in response to the cumulative point becoming a predetermined value, and when the player operates the operation unit, the predetermined effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E5-2]
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation part image representing the operation part,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the first display effect is performed or when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the second display effect may be performed in a region where the second operation unit image in the fourth display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3, characterized in that.
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E5-6]
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the cumulative point is a maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5, characterized in that.

  The timer freeze effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The timer freeze effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect, for example, when the special symbol variation display is started, when the decorative symbol variation effect is started, or during the reach effect (super reach effect).

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect A. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect A, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image I1A shown in FIG. 104 (A), “100 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value. In the timer display effect, a teammate character CRA is also displayed. In the display effects described below, the explanation of the teammate character CRA is omitted unless particularly necessary. In the upper right of FIG. 104 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is changing, that is, the reach state is shown. . In the following, in the case where it is indicated that such a reach state is indicated, the description thereof is omitted unless particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, an effect that stops when the timer value of the timer image I1A is “77.7 seconds” is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), a jackpot notification effect is executed in which the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol pattern of the decorative symbol and notified as a jackpot symbol array.

[Timer freeze effect B]
105 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect B. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect B, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image that suggests the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed. The timer image I1A is the same as the timer image I1A of FIG. 104A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and “100 seconds” is shown as the initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I1C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image I1B is darkened and / or an image representing a state as if the button image I1B is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The timer image I1A indicates “80 seconds” and indicates that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, the effect that the timer value of the timer image I1A stops in 77.7 seconds is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from 80 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, 79 seconds) is changed at high speed and stopped at “77.7 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be stopped at 77.7 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), in the same manner as FIG. 104 (C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol pattern of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot is notified as a jackpot symbol array. A notification effect is executed.

[Timer freeze effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect C. In FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect C, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1D and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, as in FIG. 105A, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed. In the timer image I1D, the timer value is displayed by the count-up method, and “0 seconds” is set as the initial value of the timer.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1D are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 as in FIG. 105B, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The timer image I1D indicates “75 seconds” and indicates that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 75 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 106C, the timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, the effect that the timer value of the timer image I1A stops in 77.7 seconds is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from 75 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, 76 seconds) is changed at a high speed and stopped at “77.7 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be stopped at 77.7 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), in the same manner as FIG. 105 (D), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol pattern of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot is notified as a jackpot symbol array. A notification effect is executed.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of timer freeze effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, timer display (timer image display) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). Display is performed, and a display for notifying the jackpot using the stopped timer value is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is executed, and the timer is operated in response to the player operating the effect button 63. A display for stopping (stopping) the displayed timer value at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display for notifying the jackpot using the stopped timer value is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and to give a sense of participation in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in the case where a display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is made in the timer stop effect, When the timer value becomes a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) before the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is started, and the effect button 63 is within the effective operation period. When the operation is performed, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised, the player can be prevented from losing the operation timing of the effect button 63, and the participation rate in the game can be improved. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after a timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), In the notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is made the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect, so that the jackpot is notified. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) that becomes a doublet by the timer stop effect is made. Thereafter, in the jackpot notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) that becomes a doublet stopped by the timer stop effect, so that the jackpot is notified. According to this configuration, the player can be notified of the jackpot in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can quickly recognize the jackpot. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer freeze effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is executed, and the player operates the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I1C. In response to this, a display for stopping (stopping) the timer value at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display for notifying the jackpot using the stopped timer value is executed. The invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the effect button 63, a display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed. Then, a display for notifying the jackpot may be executed using the stopped timer value.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after a timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), In the notification effect, the jackpot is notified by making the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, you may make it alert | report a jackpot using the timer value (77.7 second) of the timer display stopped in the timer stop effect as it is.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other doublets such as 11.1, 111, 33.3 may be used. In addition, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to a flat eye and may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be a number of seconds obtained by subtracting a timer value to be stopped by a timer stop effect described later from the start seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value to stop by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, the effective operation period may be 2.3 seconds.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed simultaneously. Also good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect I1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display,
The certain display may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain display may be displayed in the second mode,
The certain display may be displayed in the third aspect,
The certain display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect including a display for counting a timer value using a timer image;
The certain display of the second aspect is a display of an aspect including a display that stops the timer value of the timer image at the first predetermined value;
The certain display of the third aspect is a display of an aspect including a display that suggests a jackpot using the timer value of the timer image,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second aspect after being displayed in the first aspect, and then displayed in the third aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect I1-2]
An operation unit that receives a player's operation and can execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in the fourth aspect,
The certain display of the fourth aspect is a display of an aspect including a display of an operation unit image that prompts a player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the fourth mode when displayed in the first mode, and the player operates the operation unit by displaying the operation unit image in the fourth mode. It is a display that may be displayed in the third mode after being displayed in the second mode and displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-1, characterized in that.

[Aspect 3]
In the case where the display of the second aspect is performed in the certain display, when the timer value becomes a second predetermined value before the first predetermined value, the operation of the operation unit is effective. A period is started, and when the operation unit is operated within the operation effective period, the timer value is stopped at the first predetermined value.
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-2, characterized in that.

[Aspect 4]
The third aspect is a display that suggests a jackpot using a decorative design,
When the display of the third mode is made after the display of the second mode in the certain display, the symbol arrangement of the decorative design is changed to the first pattern stopped in the second mode. By making the same as the predetermined value of 1, suggest a jackpot,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I1-1 to I1-3, which is characterized in that.

[Aspect 5]
The design pattern of the decorative design that is the same as the first predetermined value stopped in the second aspect is a doublet,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, which is characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the chance up meter effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This chance-up meter effect is during a jackpot game, during a decorative symbol variation effect (for example, when a special symbol variation display starts, a decorative symbol variation effect starts, or a reach effect (super reach effect)) Can be executed.

[Chance up meter production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect A. FIG.
In the chance up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107A, a chance up meter image I2A and a timer image I2B are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance up suggested image I2A2, and a chance up planned suggestion image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which a meter region (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Represents the period of the chance up meter production. The chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is arranged on the meter image I2AA. When the cursor image I2A1 moves and the cursor image I2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3, a chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance up effect is executed, the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance up suggestion image I2A2. The chance up suggestion image I2A2 is arranged on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance up effect has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image I2AA, the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3, and thus represents the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

  The timer image I2B is displayed while the chance up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the chance up meter effect starts or after the chance up suggested image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed by the countdown method, and 15 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. An effect representing that the two match is performed. The timing coincidence display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, It may be an effect representing that the timing coincides with 7.77 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed. The high expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high.

  On the other hand, in the timing discrepancy effect shown in FIG. 107 (D), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. An effect indicating that they do not match is performed. Note that the timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, The effect may indicate that the timing of 7.77 seconds does not match.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance-up image I2D is an image that suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively low. That is, when the low expectation chance up image I2D appears, the big hit expectation degree is lower than when the high expectation chance up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect B. FIG.
In the chance up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 108A, a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2B, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are the same as those shown in FIG. The button image I2E is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 108 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 108 (B), in the timing coincidence display effect, as in FIG. 107 (B), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 and the timer image I2B in the chance up meter image I2A. An effect indicating that the timing at which the timer value at 0 coincides with the timing of 0 seconds is performed.

  A button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I2F is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image I2E is darkened and / or an image representing a state as if the button image I2E is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I2F, the characters “Press!” Are also shown. The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B becomes “0 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed after a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value becomes “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2F. The high expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the big hit expectation degree is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

  On the other hand, in the timing discrepancy effect shown in FIG. 108 (D), as in FIG. 107 (D), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer in the timer image I2B. An effect indicating that the timing at which the value becomes 0 seconds does not match is performed. A button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image similar to that shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance up image I2D is an image suggesting that the big hit expectation degree is relatively low, as in FIG.

[Chance up meter production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect C. FIG.
In the chance up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 109A, a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2G, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as those shown in FIG. The timer image I2G is displayed while the chance up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at a predetermined timing after the chance up meter effect starts or after the chance up suggestion image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, the timer value is displayed by the count-up method, and 0 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 109 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 109 (B), in the timing matching display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. The button image I2H is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I2H is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the button image I2E is darkened and / or the button image I2E is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I2H, the characters “Press!” Are also shown.
In the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value, and the button image I2H is displayed. Represents a match.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2H. The high expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the big hit expectation degree is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

  On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109 (D), as in FIG. 109 (B), when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. In the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value, and the button image I2H is displayed. Indicates that they do not match.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the big hit expectation degree is relatively low, as in FIG. 107 (E).

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of the effects of chance up meter production.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timer display (timer image display) is executed during the display of the chance up meter image I2A (chance up meter effect). ing. According to this structure, since the display which handles two different types of time is made, the player can have a sense of expectation over time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer value in the timer image becomes a predetermined value. The high expectation chance up effect or the low expectation chance up effect may be executed based on the above timing. According to this configuration, since the high expectation chance up effect can be executed based on the display that handles two different types of time, the player can have a greater expectation due to the progress of these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer value in the timer image becomes a predetermined value. When the timing coincides with, the high expectation chance up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when a display that handles two different types of time is synchronized, a high expectation chance up effect can be executed, so that the player may have a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up planned suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer value in the timer image becomes a predetermined value. When the timing does not match, there is a case where a low expectation chance up effect is executed. According to this configuration, when the displays that handle two different types of time are not synchronized, a low-expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so the player has a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. Can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, in the timing match display effect or the timing mismatch display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value, the effect button 63 is displayed to the player. The button image I2H that promotes the pressing of the button is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of participating in the game and improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a chance up meter effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the chance up meter display and the timer display are executed as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and other display indicating the passage of time may be executed. Here, the display indicating the passage of other time may be, for example, a meter or an indicator indicating time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer image Although the high expectation chance up effect is configured to be executed when the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings coincide with each other, various effects such as a pseudo-continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of reach, and a notice that suggests development into a super reach effect may be executed. In this case, for the effects after the timing mismatch display effects, effects different from these effects may be executed. Also in this case, the effect that is executed when the timings match is selected as an effect that has a higher expectation than the effect that is executed when the timings do not match.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, in the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image Although the low expectation chance up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value does not match, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings do not match, various effects such as a pseudo-continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of reach, and a notice that suggests development into a super reach effect may be executed. In this case, for the effects after the timing matching display effects, effects different from these effects may be executed. In this case as well, an effect that is executed when the timing does not match is selected that has a lower expectation than the effect that is executed when the timing matches.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance up meter effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed simultaneously. May be.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance increase is suggested by using the high expectation chance increase image I2C and the low expectation chance increase image I2D as the chance increase effect. It is not limited. For example, as a chance increase, you can specifically display the jackpot expectation level (such as “Expectation 50%!”), Suggest the jackpot expectation level by color, suggest the jackpot expectation level by voice, A display that suggests the expected degree of jackpot may be displayed with a predetermined character.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The first period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed,
The first period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display represents from the start to the end of the certain period by moving from the start position through the specific position to the end position,
The first period display is a display including a specific position display for notifying the specific position,
The cursor display moves from the start position to the specific position, and represents from the start of the certain period to the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start during the display of the reach effect display.
The second period display may be executed during the first period display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I2-2]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display different from the first effect display,
The second period display is a timer display;
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, the second effect is based on the first timing and the second timing when the timer display becomes a predetermined value. May perform display,
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect I2-3]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display becomes a predetermined value coincide with each other. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect I2-4]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, when the first timing does not coincide with the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value, The first effect display may be executed at the first timing.
A gaming machine according to aspect I2-2 or aspect I2-3.
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including a first chance up effect,
The second effect display is a display including a second chance up effect having a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the first chance up effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-2 to I2-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect I2-6]
The second effect display is an effect having a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the first effect display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 5, characterized in that.
[Aspect 7]
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of an operation unit image for the player to promote the operation of the operation unit,
When the timer display is executed, the display of the operation unit image is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-6, which is characterized in that.

  The hold timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This on-hold timer effect may be used during decorative symbol variation production (for example, when special symbol variation display is started, decorative symbol variation production is started, reach production (super-reach production)), or during jackpot games. Can be executed. The hold timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed over a plurality of variations, and the hold timer effect C is an effect that can be executed with the changes.

[Hold timer effect A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect A. In FIG.
In the hold timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 110A, a hold icon I3 and a timer image I3C are displayed. The hold icon I3 includes a first hold icon I3B (up to eight) indicating hold and a second hold icon I3A indicating the hold. For the sake of simplicity, in the figure, only the first hold icons (up to four) corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. Accordingly, the first hold icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, the same holds for the hold timer effect.

  The timer image I3C is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image I3C shown in FIG. 110 (A), 15 seconds as the timer initial value is shown. This timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the specific first hold icon I3B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, with the hold shift, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one, and then the effect that the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes 0 seconds is executed. The In the upper right of FIG. 110 (B), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, that is, all the decorative symbols are changing. Hereinafter, in such a state, the description thereof will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the hold change display effect is executed. In this on-hold change display effect, the color of the first on-hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C changes, and characters indicating “heat” are displayed on the on-hold icon. Thereby, it can be suggested that the expectation level for jackpots has increased in the variation effect corresponding to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the hold change display effect suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the change effect corresponding to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C.

[Holding timer effect B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect B.
In the hold timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, a hold icon I3 (first hold icon I3B and second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. Since the hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as those in FIG. 110A, description thereof is omitted.
The button image I3D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that an effect using the effect button 63 can be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, with the hold shift, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes “0” seconds. Executed.

  In the time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I3E is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is represented as “PUSH” in the image, and the button image I3D is darkened and / or an image representing a state where the button image I3D is lit. It is. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I3E, the characters “Press!” Are also shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a hold expectation level suggestion effect is executed. In this hold expectation suggestion effect, the hold expectation suggestion image I3F is displayed so as to correspond to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The hold expectation degree suggestion image I3F suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect corresponding to the first hold icon I3B to be associated. The hold expectation degree suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Holding timer effect C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect C.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 112A, a hold icon I3 (first hold icon I3B and second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacent to be associated with the second hold icon I3A. The functions of the hold icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as those in FIG. In the hold timer effect, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, a button image I3E is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 111B, and an effect in which the timer value of the timer image I3C is “0” seconds is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a pseudo-continuous effect production is executed. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous suggestion image I3G is displayed so as to correspond to the second hold icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-continuous suggestion image I3G suggests that the pseudo-continuous presentation is being executed and the number of pseudo-continuous presentations in the variation presentation (the fluctuation presentation) corresponding to the second hold icon I3A to be associated. . The pseudo continuous suggestion image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

  Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of fluctuation change or during reach effect, for example, an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, or a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol An effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops at least a part, an effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-relation such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”, Includes an effect to execute a decorative design variation effect.

[Example of effects]
An example of the effect of the hold timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and a predetermined effect (hold) is based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A change display effect, a hold expectation level suggestion effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, the player's interest in holding can be attracted, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (holding change display effect, hold expectation level suggesting effect, or pseudo-continuous effect) is executed on the held icon I3. According to this structure, a player's interest can be attracted more with respect to specific hold, As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and can increase the player's interest in specific hold. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. An effect (a hold change display effect or a hold expectation level suggestion effect) suggesting a jackpot expectation level is executed on the held icon I3. According to this configuration, an effect suggesting the degree of jackpot expectation is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, so that the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, Interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the hold associated with the timer image I3C is based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. The hold change display effect is executed for the icon I3. According to this configuration, since the mode of the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C changes, the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (holding change display effect, hold expectation suggestion effect, or pseudo-continuous effect) is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, the player's interest can be attracted to the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C until the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 112, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the button image I3E that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, a predetermined effect (holding expectation suggestion effect or pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. According to this structure, it can suppress that a player misses the operation timing of the production | presentation button 63, and the participation rate in a game can be improved, As a result, an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a hold timer effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described timeout display effect can be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A and the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a hold change display effect as shown in FIG. 110 (C), a hold expectation degree suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 111 (C), or a chance. Up production may be performed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B and the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the hold change display effect or the hold expectation degree suggestion effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a chance-up effect may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, The hold expectation level suggesting effect or the pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and a predetermined effect may be executed when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the hold timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more are displayed. These timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. 110 to 111 are effects executed over a plurality of variations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variations It is good also as an effect performed only by. 112 is an effect executed with the change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an effect executed over a plurality of changes.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect I3-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The hold icon includes an icon representing a hold and an icon representing the hold,
It is configured to be able to notify the number of holds on the display number of the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
As one effect of the plurality of effects, there may be a first effect.
As one effect of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect of performing timer display,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed. In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other. The second effect is performed based on the timer display of the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I3-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer display, the second display is performed for the hold icon associated with the timer display. The production of
A gaming machine according to aspect I3-1, characterized in that.
[Aspect I3-3]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
A gaming machine according to aspect I3-1 or aspect I3-2 [Aspect I3-4]
The second effect is an effect of performing a jackpot expectation suggestion display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
[Aspect I3-5]
The jackpot expectation suggestion display is a display that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-4, characterized in that.
[Aspect I3-6]
In the combination effect, the second effect is performed when the timer display of the first effect becomes a predetermined value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-5, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect I3-7]
It has an operation unit that can be operated by the player,
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit is displayed, and the player operates the operation unit. When the second production is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-6, which is characterized in that.

  In the following, the timer appearance acquisition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. This appearance obtaining effect can be executed during the decorative effect variation effect, for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect). In particular, the timer appearance acquisition effect can be executed in the final stage of the reach effect (super reach effect).

[Timer appearance acquisition effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the timer appearance acquisition effect A.
In the timer output effect acquisition A, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 113 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is aligned with 7 symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, a timer image I4A and a teammate character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image I4A shown in FIG. 113 (B), “5 seconds” is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), a payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In the payout scheduled payout display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I4A reaches 0 seconds, the payout payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed. The payout planned number-of-balls suggestion image I4B is an image that suggests the number of jackpots that are scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 113 (C), it is shown that in the payout planned number-of-balls suggestion image I4B, 1500 balls can be paid out during the jackpot game.

[Timer appearance acquisition effect B]
FIG. 114 is a view for explaining the timer appearance acquisition effect B. FIG.
In the timer payout acquisition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown as in FIG. 113 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, a timer image I4A and a teammate character CRA are displayed as in FIG. 113 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button press promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A is “0 seconds” and the button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button image I4C is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image representing “PUSH” in the image and representing a state as if it is lit. In addition, in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 adjacent to the button image I4C, the characters “Press!” Are also shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, the payout payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 113C in response to the press of the effect button 63 by the player.

[Timer appearance acquisition effect C]
FIG. 115 is a view for explaining the timer appearance acquisition effect C. FIG.
In the timer payout acquisition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols is shown as in FIG. 113 (A).

Next, the timer display effect (timer initial value is large) shown in FIG. 115 (B) or the timer display effect (timer initial value is small) shown in FIG. 115 (E) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the timer display effect (timer initial value is large), a timer image I4D of “15 seconds” having a relatively large timer initial value is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button press promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes “0 second” and the button image I4C is displayed as in FIG. 114C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout-scheduled payout display effect, as in FIG. 114 (D), it is suggested that the number of payout-scheduled balls is relatively large in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. The payout planned number-of-balls suggestion image I4B to be displayed is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 115 (E), a timer image I4A of “5 seconds” having a relatively small timer initial value is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button-pressing promotion display effect, the timer image I4A has a timer value of “0 seconds” and a button image I4C is displayed, as in FIG. 114 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), a payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, the payout planned payout number suggestion image I4E suggesting that the number of payout planned payouts is relatively small is 700 balls. Is displayed.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer appearance acquisition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and payout planned number-of-balls suggestion images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, since the timer display is performed before the payout planned number-of-balls suggestion display is executed, the player's interest in the number of planned payouts can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value becomes 0 seconds, the payout expected ball number suggestion images I4B and I4E are displayed. Is done. According to this configuration, when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the payout planned payout number display is performed, so that the player's interest in the payout planned payout number can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and a button image I4C that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. In response to pressing of the effect button 63, payout planned number-of-balls suggestion images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of participating in the game and improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer appearance acquisition effect C, the timer image I4D having a relatively large timer initial value is displayed. Compared with the case where the timer image I4A having a relatively small timer initial value is displayed, the value indicating the number of balls scheduled to be paid out indicated by the payout planned ball number display image in the payout planned ball display effect is large. . According to this structure, a player's interest can be improved with respect to the timer display before the display of the payout expected ball number suggestion image is made. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the timer appearance acquisition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, in the button press promotion display effect, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D become 0 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be configured to be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer appearance acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 is at the start of the special symbol variation display, during the decorative symbol variation representation, or during the reach representation (super reach production), etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display effect, the button-pressing promotion effect, and the payout-scheduled ball display effect among the timer appearance acquisition effects may be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer appearance acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. You may make it display a timer image simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when it becomes a predetermined value, the above-described timeout display effect can be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display,
The certain display is a display performed when winning a jackpot lottery,
The certain display may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain display may be displayed in the second mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including a timer display,
The second aspect is an aspect including a payout number suggestion display indicating a number of game media scheduled to be paid out during a jackpot game based on the jackpot,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second mode after the timer value of the timer display in the first mode becomes the first predetermined value.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect I4-3]
An operation unit that receives a player's operation and can execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in the third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect including display of an operation unit image that prompts a player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, displayed in the third mode when displayed in the first mode, and then the player has operated the operation unit. Depending on the case, it may be displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine according to aspect I4-1 or aspect I4-2.
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, and is displayed in the third mode before the timer value in the first mode reaches the second predetermined value. Thereafter, the player performs the operation. Depending on the operation of the part, it may be displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-3, characterized in that.
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, the initial value of the timer value may be a first value and a second value larger than the first value,
When the initial value of the timer value in the first aspect is the second value when the second aspect is displayed after being displayed in the first aspect in the certain display. Compared with the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the first value, the number of game media to be paid out shown in the payout number suggestion display in the second mode is The value to represent is large,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I4-1 to I4-4, which is characterized in that.

[Other variations]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited thereto. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a swing-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. Also good. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there is a case where the display effect is executed using the button image representing the effect button 63. Instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a display effect using the image showing a lever or a trigger.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time is displayed using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time may be expressed by a meter method or an indicator method.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  Further, two or more effects and / or modifications may be combined among the above-described effects and / or modifications. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be executed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of an above-described aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. This aspect can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents are included in this aspect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display apparatus (display means)
7a ... Display screen 9A, 9B, 9C ... Hold icon 15 ... Board movable body 63 ... Production button (operation means)
64 ... Sword member (operating means)
65 ... Sword button (operation means)
68 ... Select button (operation means)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (7)

An operation means operable by the player
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing the appearance of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing the appearance of the operation means,
In a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, the second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in the first direction. After the first effect and the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction with the first image being displayed. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the second performance. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the second performance, the second image is not displayed. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The gaming machine, wherein a display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than a display time of the second image in the first effect. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image and the third image are larger than the first image, respectively. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
In the first effect, the second image is displayed tilted with respect to the first image. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
In the first performance, the second image may be displayed so as to overlap with a decorative design. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position in a state where the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

Images